Samsung Tablet GT P7510MAVXAB User Guide

A N D R O I D  
T A B L E T  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
device and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
Samsung Electronics America (SEA), Inc  
Address:  
85 Challenger Road  
Ridgefield Park,  
New Jersey  
07660  
Toll Free  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
Telephone:  
Internet  
Address:  
©2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?  
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, XT9® Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance  
Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Calendar, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google  
Play Books, Google Play Music, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype is a trademark of Swype, Inc.  
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
®
, DivX , DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
TM  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX  
videos.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (Apps > Settings >  
About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to  
complete your registration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6: Internet and Social  
Networking ............................................. 78  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Health and Safety  
Information ........................................... 202  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO  
THIRD PARTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION  
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION  
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section helps you to quickly start using your device.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
Understanding This User Manual  
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of  
your device. A robust index for features begins on page 249.  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual  
displays may vary depending on the software version of  
your device and any changes to the device’s settings.  
Also included is important safety information, beginning on  
page 202, that you should know before using your device.  
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the  
default display settings. If you select other settings,  
navigation steps may be different.  
Special Text  
In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This  
special text is intended to point out important information,  
share quick methods for activating features, define terms,  
and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:  
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual  
assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a  
Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more  
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,  
or sub-menu.  
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings  
and may vary from your device depending on the  
software version on your device and any changes to the  
device’s settings.  
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.  
Important: Points out important information about the current  
feature that could affect performance.  
Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can  
help to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your  
device.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
   
Text Conventions  
This manual provides condensed information about how to  
use your device. To make this possible, the following text  
conventions are used to represent often-used steps:  
Warning! Use only approved charging devices. Approved  
accessories are designed to maximize battery life.  
Using other accessories may invalidate your  
warranty and may cause damage.  
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting  
successiveoptionsinlonger,orrepetitive,procedures.For  
example:  
Battery Indicator  
The Battery icon  
in the Status Bar shows the battery  
power level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device  
prompts you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate  
the device without charging, the device powers off. For  
From a Home screen, touch  
Wireless and networks  
Apps  
Wi-Fi settings.  
Settings  
Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion  
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable)  
are included with the device for charging the battery.  
Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status.  
Charging the Battery  
Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet  
Connector, Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your  
device from any standard AC power outlet.  
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully  
charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
After the first charge, you can use the device while  
charging.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/  
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully  
charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
Accessory Port (2).  
After the first charge, you can use the device while  
charging.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
1. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1)..  
Charger/Accessory  
Port  
Correct  
3. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power  
outlet.  
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen  
does not function due to an unstable power supply,  
unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet  
or unplug the USB cable from the device.  
Incorrect  
Charging  
Head  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
4. When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head  
from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from  
the device.  
Note: Your device’s internal antenna is located along the top  
back of the device. Do not block the antenna; doing so  
may affect signal quality and may cause the device to  
operate at a higher power level than is necessary. For  
Turning Your Device On and Off  
Turning Your Device On  
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
.
Turning Your Device Off  
1. Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
.
2. At the prompt, touch Power off  
OK.  
Setting Up Your Device  
When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a  
few things. To do that, the following screens display. Some  
screens can be skipped (touch Skip) or re-displayed (touch  
Back). Some screens display depending on the options you  
choose.  
Welcome  
1. Touch the language field, scroll through the list, and  
touch the language you want your device to use, such  
as, English (United States).  
2. Touch Start  
.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wi-Fi  
Make it Google  
Make sure the Wi-Fi OFF / ON icon is set to ON  
choose one of the following options:  
and  
Your new device uses your Google account to fully use its  
Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google  
Talk, and Google PlayTM  
.
Touch  
not listed.  
Add network to enter a Network SSID that is  
The Make it Google screen allows you to create a new  
Google account or sign in, if you already have a Google  
account.  
Touch  
of Wi-Fi networks.  
Scan to make sure you have an accurate list  
Note: If you skipped Wi-Fi setup, the Wi-Fi setup screen  
Touch one of the Wi-Fi networks in the list, enter the  
password, and touch Connect. Touch and connect to  
another Wi-Fi network or touch Next to continue.  
displays and you must connect through a Wi-Fi network.  
Touch Sign in and then enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
Touch Skip to perform this task later. For more  
Set Date and Time  
1. Touch the time zone field (GMT+00:00) and select the  
Touch Get an account or enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
correct time zone.  
2. Under Date, set the date (month, day, year), if  
necessary.  
Touch Not now to perform this task later. For more  
3. Under Time, set the time (hour, minute, and AM or PM),  
if necessary.  
4. Touch Next  
.
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
 
Enable Purchases  
This Tablet Belongs To ...  
This screen displays if you signed in to your Google account.  
To personalize the tablet with your name:  
1. Touch the First and Last fields and use the on-screen  
keyboard to enter you first and last name.  
Enter purchase information for your Google Play  
account and touch Save  
.
2. Touch Next  
.
– or –  
Google Services  
Touch Skip  
.
This screen displays if you did not signed in to your Google  
account. The use of this device is subject to the privacy  
policy and other terms.  
1. Touch Learn more to read the privacy policy and other  
terms.  
Backup and Restore  
This screen also displays if you signed in to your Google  
account.  
1. Read the backup and restore information.  
2. Enable either or both options.  
2. Touch Next, if you agree that your device may receive  
and install updates from Google.  
3. Touch Next  
.
The Restoring screen displays while your information is  
being restored.  
Setup Complete  
Congratulations! Your device is set up and ready to use.  
Use Google Location  
Touch Finish  
.
1. Read the information on the screen and enable either  
or both of the Google location services.  
2. Touch Next to continue.  
The main Home screen displays.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Retrieving Your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to  
Task Manager  
Your device can run applications simultaneously and some  
applications run in the background.  
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on  
your device and to end running applications to extend battery  
life. You can also uninstall applications from your device and  
see how much memory is used by applications.  
navigate to http://google.com/accounts  
.
Task Manager Pop-Up  
The Task manager pop-up provides information about Active  
applications and includes a RAM manager. It also has a link to  
the Task Manager application.  
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your  
account? link and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Using Google Maps  
In order to use some applications related to Google Maps,  
you must first connect Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to  
To access the Task manager pop-up:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Mini App Tray  
Task manager.  
You must also enable location services to use Google Maps.  
Some features require Standalone or Google location  
– or –  
Add the Program monitor widget to a Home screen and  
then touch the Program monitor widget. For more  
The Task manager pop-up displays.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
         
2. Touch the Active applications tab to view applications  
running on your device. Touch to end an  
– or –  
Access Task Manager from the Task manager pop-up.  
application or End all to stop all running applications.  
3. Touch the RAM manager tab to display the amount of  
Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch  
Clear memory to clear inactive and background  
processes.  
– or –  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager.  
2. Touch Active applications to view applications running  
on your device. Touch End to end an application or  
End all to end all running applications.  
4. Touch  
in the top right corner of the Task manager  
pop-up to close the application.  
5. Touch  
in the top left corner to display the Task  
3. Touch Downloaded to view applications installed from  
Google Play. Touch Uninstall to remove an application  
from your device.  
Manager application.  
Task Manager Application  
The Task Manager application provides information about  
applications, including Active applications  
4. Touch RAM manager to display the amount of Random  
Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear  
memory to clear inactive and background processes.  
5. Touch Storage to view internal (Device memory) and  
external (SD card) storage memory statistics.  
,
Downloaded, RAM  
manager Storage, and Help  
,
.
To access the Task Manager:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Task manager.  
6. Touch Help to view useful tips for extending battery life.  
– or –  
From any screen, touch and hold  
touch in the top left corner.  
Home and then  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking the device manually  
Press the Power/Lock Key  
Galaxy Tab Accessories  
To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab:  
.
.
Unlocking the Device  
1. Press the Power/Lock Key  
The Lock screen displays.  
.
Galaxy Tab accessories display.  
2. Use your model number to find compatible  
accessories.  
Securing Your Device  
By default, the device locks automatically when the screen  
times out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the  
device using one of the default Unlock screens or, for  
increased security, use a personal screen unlock pattern.  
For more information about creating and enabling a Screen  
For other settings related to securing your device, see  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
Getting Started  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2. Swipe across the screen as shown.  
Troubleshooting  
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may  
need to reset the device to regain functionality.  
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and  
hold the Power/Lock Key  
for at least 20  
seconds.  
The last screen you accessed displays.  
Note: You can customize the Lock screen and set the type of  
Screen Unlock you want to use (Pattern, PIN, or  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 2: Understanding Your Device  
This section outlines key features of your device and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the  
device is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the  
device.  
Photo Gallery that supports GIF, AGIF, JPEG, PNG, BMP, and WBMP  
formats  
HD Video Player (720p)  
Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP43  
Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX  
Features  
®
®
10.1-inch WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen  
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including  
premium content  
TM  
Android Version 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich  
®
®
May play DivX® video up to HD 1080p.  
Full HTML Web Browser with Adobe Flash Technology  
®
Music player that supports WAV, MP3, AAC+, eAAC+, AMR, WMA,  
MID, FLAC, IMY, RTTTL/RTX, OTA, and Vorbis formats  
1GB RAM memory and 16GB or 32GB on-board memory, which is  
used for data storage and access  
Bluetooth 2.1 Wireless technology. For more information, refer  
Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 a/b/g/n)  
3 Megapixel camera and camcorder with flash plus 2 Megapixel  
Preloaded applications such as Google PlayTM Store, Google  
forward-facing camera for Video Chat  
TM  
TM  
®
Play Books, QuickOffice , AllShare, Music Hub, Social Hub,  
Movie Studio, and Samsung Media Hub. For more information,  
Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTube  
,
TM  
Google Maps , and Voice Search)  
Messaging Features:  
TM  
Gmail  
Note: This device does not support external memory cards.  
Email (corporate and personal)  
Google Talk (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)  
TM  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
   
1
Warning! This device does not support some USB storage  
2
3
1
Front and Side Views  
The following items can be found on the front and sides of  
your device as illustrated.  
4
1. External Speakers: Used in music or video playback,  
notification tones, and for other sounds.  
2. Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness  
automatically and when taking photos with the  
Front-facing Camera.  
3. Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos.  
4. Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen  
rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Top and Bottom Views  
The following items can be found on the top and bottom of  
your device.  
1. Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to turn the device on or  
off. Press to lock the device or to wake the screen for  
unlocking.  
1
2
2. Volume Key: From a Home screen, press to adjust  
Master Volume. During music playback, press to adjust  
volume.  
3
4
3. Charger/Accessory Port: Plug in a USB cable for  
charging or to sync music and files.  
5
4. Microphone: Used to pick up your voice or audio during  
recording.  
5. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for headphones.  
Understanding Your Device  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Back View  
The following items can be found on the back of your device.  
1. Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording  
videos.  
Home Screen  
The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
2. Camera Flash: Used when taking photos.  
1. Google Search: Search your tablet and the web by  
1
2
2. App Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common applications. For  
3. Home screen: The starting point for using your device.  
Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize  
your device to your needs.  
4. Current screen: Indicates which Home screen is being  
5. Widgets: Applications that run on the Home screen.  
Some widgets are found on the Home screen by  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Home: Display the central Home screen. Touch and  
hold to display the Task Manager pop-up.  
9. Navigation: Open a list of thumbnail images of apps  
you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open  
it. Touch and hold to display the Apps screen. Touch  
and then touch Task manager to display the Task  
Manager.  
Tip: The area across the top of the screen is called the  
Application Bar.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
10. Quick Launch: This softkey can be set to launch several  
different applications. The default setting is Screen  
11. Primary Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common features.  
These shortcuts are found on the Home screen by  
12. Mini App Tray: Shortcuts to apps that you can use  
anytime, such as your calendar, a memo pad, and a  
16  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14 15  
6. Apps: Display the Apps screen.  
7. Back: Return to the previous screen or option.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
   
13. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home  
screen where you can find navigation buttons and  
icons that show notifications, battery power, and  
connection details.  
Note: The center panel displays when you touch  
Home.  
Customizing the Home Screens  
To customize the Home screens to suit your preferences:  
1. Navigate to one of the Home screen panels.  
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays.  
14. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications  
from the system or from an application. Touch a  
Notification Icon to display more detail. For a list of  
3. Touch Add to Home screen, and then touch:  
• Apps and widgets to add app or widget shortcuts on the  
Home screen  
15. Time: The current time. For more information, refer to  
16. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Touch  
the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status  
• Folder to add a folder on a Home screen. For more  
• Page to add or remove a Home screen. For more information,  
Extended Home Screen  
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus four  
panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more  
space for adding shortcuts and widgets.  
– or –  
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to  
the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the  
top of the display shows your current position.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display Settings  
You can customize display screen settings to your  
Adding and Removing Home Screen Panels  
Your device comes with seven Home screen panels. You can  
customize the Home screen by removing or adding panels.  
Note: The panel in the center position displays when you touch  
Home  
.
2. Use these controls to configure panels:  
Remove: Touch and drag a panel to the Trash  
1. From a Home screen, pinch the screen from the left  
and right side to the center to display the editing  
screen.  
– or –  
Can to remove the panel from the Home  
screen.  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen, touch  
Add: Touch to add a new panel, up to a total  
of seven. This option is available when less  
than seven panels have been added.  
Page  
.
Default Home Page: Touch the Home icon at  
the upper right corner of a panel to set it as  
the default home screen.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
 
3. To rearrange the order of panels, touch and drag a  
Screen Capture  
panel to a new location.  
Touch  
Screen Capture to capture an image of the  
4. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen  
current screen and edit the image, then touch  
Save to save the image. Touch and hold to capture and  
add an image of the current screen to the clipboard.  
Navigating Your Device  
Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate.  
Command Buttons  
Back  
Note: A copy of the screenshot is automatically saved to the  
clipboard.  
Touch  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option, or  
To view the screen shots:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active,  
Close  
My Files  
.
Keyboard displays.  
2. Touch Root  
Pictures  
Screenshots.  
3. Touch a screen capture file to display it.  
Home  
Touch  
Navigation  
Touch  
Home to display the first center Home screen.  
Note: This softkey can be modified to launch other  
Navigation to open a list of thumbnail images of  
apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it.  
Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items. For example:  
Other Buttons  
Google Search  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Touch  
Google to search the web or your device.  
Context-Sensitive Menus  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or  
screens. To access context-sensitive menus:  
Swipe, Flick, or Slide  
Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. For example:  
Touch  
Menu to display a list of options.  
Touch an option in the list.  
Unlocking the screen.  
Application Bar  
Scrolling the Home screens or a menu.  
The Application Bar is the area along the top of various  
application screens. It usually contains the Search and Menu  
icons, as well as other icons that are used to display options  
and settings.  
Pinch  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to make an inward pinch  
motion on the screen, as if you are picking  
something up, or an outward motion by  
sweeping your fingers out.  
Screen Navigation  
Touch  
Touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
For example:  
Pinch a photo in Gallery to zoom in.  
Pinch a webpage to zoom in or out.  
Touch the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Touch a menu item to select it.  
Touch an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
       
2. Touch a notification summary to respond to it.  
3. Touch outside the Status Details screen to close the  
window.  
Notifications  
When you receive a notification, the Notification icon displays  
in the System Bar, to the left of the Time. Notifications  
indicate the arrival of Gmail, Email, alarms, and more.  
Quick Settings  
Touch a Notification icon for more detail. For example, touch  
a Gmail Notification icon to see who sent the message.  
To view and control the most common settings for your  
tablet, as well as accessing the complete Settings  
application, open the Quick Settings panel.  
1. Touch the Time in the System Bar.  
Touch the Time field to open the Notifications list to view all  
of your current notifications. Touch a Notification in the list to  
display the item. For example, touch a Gmail entry to open  
the Gmail application and view the message.  
The Quick Settings pop-up displays.  
Most apps that send notifications, such as Gmail and Google  
Talk, have individual settings that can be configured. See the  
settings for individual applications in the applicable section  
of this user manual.  
Status Details  
To display the current date and time, battery status, and  
Wi-Fi connectivity status, open Status Details.  
1. Touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
The Status Details display. If you have any current  
notifications, their summaries are listed below the  
Notifications title.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The Quick Settings are:  
• Bluetooth: Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. For more  
• Wi-Fi: Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information,  
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.  
• Sync: Synchronizes your device with the network.  
Synchronizes contacts, email, time, and a variety of accounts.  
• Brightness: Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or  
touch Auto to allow the device to set brightness automatically  
based on available light and battery charge status. For more  
• Settings: Touch to open the Settings application. For more  
• GPS: Touch to enable or disable Standalone GPS services  
.
• Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Touch to enable or disable sound  
mode.  
• Screen rotation: When On the screen rotates automatically  
from landscape to portrait and vice versa. When Off the screen  
is fixed in the current mode, either portrait or landscape. For  
• Notifications: Displays system notifications. For more  
2. Touch Clear to remove Notification Icons from the  
System Bar.  
• Power saving: When enabled, your device automatically  
analyzes the screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve  
3. Touch a notification entry to display the details.  
4. Close the Quick Settings by touching in the upper,  
X
Sweep the pop-up to the left to see additional settings.  
right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or by  
touching outside the Quick Settings screen.  
• Notification: Touch to enable or disable system and application  
Understanding Your Device  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Settings also displays icons under the Notifications  
heading to alert you to activity on the tablet such as new  
messages, application downloads, software updates, and  
more. The following table lists those icons.  
Updates Available: Updates to the applications you  
have downloaded are available.  
Wi-Fi networks available: An open Wi-Fi network is  
in range.  
Download Successful: A recent application download  
or update completed successfully.  
Status Bar  
The Status Bar is part of the System Bar and displays icons  
to show network status, battery power, and other details.  
Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to  
chat using Google Talk.  
Navigation Active: The Navigation App is active. For  
Battery Level: Shown fully charged.  
New Email Message: You have new email. Touch  
Reply to view and answer the email.  
Charging Indicator: Battery is charging.  
New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Touch the  
icon for additional information.  
Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent  
power remaining. At about 15 percent power  
remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to  
charge immediately.  
Samsung account: Set up your Samsung account.  
Software update: There is a software update  
available for this device.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USB Connection Indicator: The device is connected  
to a computer using a USB cable, but it is not  
charging. The battery is only charged while  
connected to a computer, if the device is turned off.  
When the device is off, press the Power/Lock key to  
see the battery charging indicator.  
Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more  
Music App: A song is playing in the Music app.  
Touch the Music icon or touch the Status Details to  
see the song title and music player controls. For  
Battery Fully Charged: When the battery is fully  
charged, this indicator is displayed.  
Music player: A song is playing. Touch the Music  
icon or touch the Status Details to see the song title  
and music player controls. For more information,  
USB Connected: Device is connected to a computer  
using a USB cable. Displays in upper left corner of  
screen.  
Download in progress: An application is being  
Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
downloaded to the device.  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Airplane Mode: Indicates that the Airplane Mode is  
active, which allows you to use many of your  
device’s features, but it cannot access online  
information or applications.  
Wi-Fi Direct: Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active  
and your tablet is connected to another device. For  
Set up input methods: When the keyboard is being  
displayed, touch this icon to display a menu of quick  
keyboard settings.  
GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
 
The default Primary Shortcuts are: Music Hub, Media Hub,  
Social Hub, YouTube, Maps, Internet, Play Store, and  
Samsung Apps.  
Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at  
Event: This is a notification for one or more events.  
Application shortcuts can be added to any Home screen. For  
Widgets  
Screenshot Captured: A screenshot has been  
When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets  
on the center Home screen. They can also appear on the  
Home screens to the left and right of the center Home  
screen.  
Power Saving Mode: Indicates that your device is  
automatically making adjustments to conserve  
Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place  
on the Home screens to access your favorite features.  
Adding Widgets to a Home screen  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the Widget.  
Primary Shortcuts  
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the main Home  
screen.  
2. From that Home screen, touch  
Apps.  
3. Touch the Widgets tab.  
Tip: The main Home screen is usually the center Home screen.  
Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Touch and hold the widget’s icon, then slide your finger  
Analog Clock: Display an analog clock. Touch the widget to view  
alarms or add a new alarm. For more information, refer to  
where you want to place the icon and release it.  
Note: There must be room on the screen where you want to  
place the widget, otherwise the widget will not add to  
the Home screen.  
AP Mobile: Displays Top Stories and Showbiz, Sports, World, and  
U.S. news from AP Mobile.  
Book: Touch this widget and then touch a book for quick access  
5. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Removing Widgets  
Bookmark: Choose one of your bookmarks then touch the widget  
to open the website.  
Touch and hold the Widget until the  
Delete icon  
displays, then drag the Widget toward the top of the  
screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
Calendar: Display a calendar. For more information, refer to  
Widget Options  
The following widgets are available:  
Contact: Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly  
compose an Email or Gmail message. For more information, refer  
AccuWeather.com: Display the forecast from AccuWeather.  
Touch the widget to choose locations.  
Amazon MP3: Access the Amazon MP3 app or the music player  
Contact: Display a shortcut to one of your contact entries. For  
Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.  
Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Dual clock (analog)  
:
Display the date and time for two  
Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. For more  
Google+ posts: Display a shortcut to Google+ posts. For more  
Email: Display your email inbox. For more information, refer to  
Kies via Wi-Fi: Allows computers running the KIES software to  
access your tablet. Both the tablet and the computer have to be  
on the same Wi-Fi network.  
Email account: Access an Email account. Appears once an Email  
account is set up. If you have more than one Email account set  
up, touch the one to which you want to link. For more  
Latitude: Displays your current location. Touch the location to  
open Maps, touch the check mark to open the Check in at  
pop-up, or touch the Refresh button to update your Latitude list  
TM  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Displays once a Gmail account  
is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link. For more  
Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest  
movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more  
Google Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Memo: Create and save a memo on a Home screen. For more  
Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music files  
that you have stored on your device and memory card. You can  
Google Play Music: Use this widget to control the playback of  
songs playing in the Music app. For more information, refer to  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home  
Pulse (small): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget, like Pulse  
(large), but only the article titles are displayed. Touch a title block  
to link to the article in Pulse. For more information, refer to  
Picture frame: Select one or more pictures and then touch the  
arrow on the widget for a slide show. For more information, refer  
S Bookmarks: Create bookmarks for your favorite websites. For  
S Planner (mini today): Use S Planner to organize events and  
Play Store: Download applications from the Google Play™ Store.  
Program monitor: Display the number of active  
applications. Touch to launch Task Manager. For more  
Pulse (large): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget. Choices are:  
Pulse Hints, Time Magazine, Cool Hunting, CNN Money, SB  
Nation, Fortune Tech, The Wall Street Journal, and Facebook  
Links. Touch your choice and then touch Save. Pulse article titles  
and the first lines of an article are displayed. Touch the title block  
to display that article’s first lines. Touch the introduction area to  
link to the article in Pulse. For more information, refer to “Pulse”  
S Planner (month): Use S Planner to organize events and tasks for  
S Planner (task): Use S Planner to view and edit tasks. For more  
Settings shortcut: Allows you to create a shortcut to a particular  
Social Hub: Access your social networks, like Facebook,  
Twitter, and LinkedIn all in one place. For more information,  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Software update: This shortcut makes updating your device  
2. Touch  
Apps.  
– or –  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
options pop-up displays.  
Traffic: Enter a name for the widget and a destination, and then  
touch Save. Touch the widget to use the Traffic component of the  
Touch Add to Home screen  
Apps and widgets.  
3. Touch the Apps tab.  
4. Touch and hold the application icon, then slide your  
finger where you want to place the icon and release it.  
For a list of applications, see “Apps Screen” on  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on your tablet. For  
Yahoo! Finance Search for and add stocks. For more  
:
YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. For more  
5. Touch and hold the App Shortcut and then drag the  
application icon to reposition it on the Home screen.  
Removing App Shortcuts  
App Shortcuts  
Touch and hold the App Shortcut until the  
Delete  
Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or  
features, such as Email or other applications.  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the App Shortcut.  
icon displays, then drag the App Shortcut toward the  
top of the screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To remove an App shortcut from a folder:  
1. Touch the folder to view the contents.  
2. Touch the App shortcut, drag it out of the folder, and  
drop it on the Home screen.  
Folders  
Place Folders on the Home screen to organize items together  
on the Home screen.  
Adding Folders  
Removing a Folder  
To create a folder on a Home page:  
1. Navigate to the desired Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays.  
Touch and hold the folder until the  
Delete icon  
displays, then drag the folder toward the top of the  
screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
3. Touch Add to Home screen  
A new folder displays on the Home screen.  
Managing Folders  
To name a folder:  
Touch the folder, touch the Unnamed folder field, and  
use the keyboard to enter a name for the folder.  
Folder.  
Note: Any App shortcuts in the folder are deleted.  
Wallpapers  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,  
Lock screen, or on both the Home and Lock screens. Choose  
from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have  
downloaded or taken with the Camera.  
To add an App shortcut to a folder:  
1. Add the App shortcut to the Home screen that the  
folder is on.  
1. From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.  
The Home screen options pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Home screen  
screens  
,
Lock screen, or Home and lock  
2. Touch and hold the App shortcut, drag it to the folder,  
and drop it.  
.
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
       
The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays the  
following options:  
Mini App Tray  
There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might  
need while working in other apps, such as Alarm, Calculator,  
Calendar, Email, Music player, Pen memo, Task manager,  
and World clock. In some cases, these shortcuts are actually  
links to the part of the app you need most and they contain a  
link to the actual app where you can use other functions.  
• Gallery: Access the Gallery to select a photo. Touch a photo to  
select it. Crop and resize the picture, if desired. Touch Done to  
save the picture as wallpaper. Touch Cancel to cancel.  
• Livewallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated  
wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper to see an example. If available,  
touch Settings to view options for the selection. Touch Set  
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
bottom, center of the screen.  
wallpaper to save your choice.Touch  
Back to return to  
The Mini App Tray icons display.  
the Live wallpapers menu.  
• Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch  
an image to view it. Touch Set wallpaper to save it as  
wallpaper. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Note: Live wallpapers is not available for the Lock screen.  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray to customize the  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Touch one of the icons to  
display a mini app pop-up.  
The pop-up varies depending  
on the application. Various  
controls display at the top of  
the pop-up and other  
Customizing the Mini App Tray  
You can choose applications to display on the Mini App Tray  
and arrange them in any order.  
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
bottom, center of the screen.  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray.  
3. Touch and drag apps in and out of the tray or to  
another position in the tray.  
information is displayed in  
the body of the pop-up.  
4. Touch options (such as  
) to create new app items  
4. Touch Done to save your changes.  
(such as alarms or events).  
Apps Screen  
5. Touch items in the body of the pop-up, such as an  
email entry or keys on the Calculator.  
The Apps screen displays all applications installed on your  
wireless device. Applications that you download and install  
from Google Play™ or from the web are also added to a  
Home screen.  
6. Touch  
7. Touch to close the mini app pop-up.  
to link to the application. For more  
The Apps icons are arranged in a customizable grid. To  
arrange the Apps icons in alphabetical order:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu View type  
3. Touch Alphabetical grid  
Apps.  
.
.
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
     
To manually change the order of the icons on the Apps  
screen:  
Application Information  
To view information about an App, such as the amount of  
storage it uses, force the App to stop, uninstall updates, and  
clear data:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Edit  
Apps.  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps.  
3. Touch and hold an icon and drag it to a new position.  
2. Touch and hold an App icon, then drag it to  
App info to open a screen with details about  
the App.  
4. Touch Save to save the changes.  
You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen  
for quick access to the application. For more information,  
3. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
To view your downloaded applications:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Applications  
The following is an alphabetical list of the applications that  
come preloaded on your device.  
Apps.  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications  
.
3. Touch an icon on the Downloaded applications screen  
Alarm: Schedule alarms to remind you of  
appointments or events, or as a wake-up. For more  
to launch the application.  
– or –  
Add an App Shortcut to a Home screen by dragging the  
App icon onto the Home Screen. For more information,  
AllShare: Synchronize your device with your TV. For  
Amazon KindleTM: Download Amazon® books to  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Amazon MP3: Access the Amazon MP3 store and  
the Amazon Cloud Player. For more information,  
Downloads: Files, apps, and other items you  
download in Internet, Gmail, Email, or in other  
ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal storage.  
Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
what you have downloaded. For more information,  
Calculator: The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions to solve simple arithmetic  
problems and advanced operators to solve more  
eBook: This application lets you access and read  
Calendar: Record events and appointments to  
Email: Send and receive email from your device. For  
Camera: Take photos or record videos. A shortcut to  
Camera displays on the Home screen by default. For  
Gallery: View and manage photos stored on your  
Contacts: Save and manage contact information for  
your friends and colleagues. For more information,  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s  
Google+: Share updates and see what is going on  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Internet: Access the Internet. A shortcut to Internet  
displays on the Home screen by default. For more  
Messenger: With Google MessengerTM, you can  
bring groups of friends together into a simple group  
Latitude: Use Google Latitude to locate your friends  
on a map and share or hide your location. For more  
Movie Studio: Use Movie Studio to edit the videos  
you take with the camcorder or copy onto your  
tablet into movies. You can cut and order scenes,  
add a sound track, and so on. For more information,  
Local: Use Google Local and Google Maps to find  
places of interest and to add your own favorite  
Music Hub: The Music Hub lets you purchase and  
download songs and albums. A shortcut to Music  
Hub appears on the Home screen by default. For  
Maps: Find locations and get directions with Google  
Media Hub: Browse the latest movies and TV shows,  
then rent or purchase the media for viewing on your  
Music Player Play music and other audio files that you  
copy from your computer. For more information, refer  
:
My Files: Find, view and manage files stored on an  
optional installed memory card. For more  
Memo: Create text memos and use Bluetooth to  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Navigation: Use Google Maps NavigationTM to  
search for locations, with turn-by-turn directions.  
Play Music: Play music and other audio files that you  
copy from your computer with the Music app. For more  
Play Store: Browse, download, and install Android  
applications. A shortcut to Play Store displays on  
the Home screen by default. For more information,  
Pen memo: This app is not only useful, but lots of  
fun, if you like to draw. Pen memo lets you type  
memos or draw pictures. For more information,  
Pulse: Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-  
Photo editor: To perfect any photos stored on your  
tablet, use Photo editor to crop, rotate, resize,  
adjust color and contrast, and much more. For more  
Quickoffice HD: The Quickoffice application allows  
you to create and save Microsoft Word, Excel, and  
Powerpoint documents. You can also view existing  
Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Google Play Books service. For more information,  
Play Movies: Use the Play Movies app to view  
movies you rent from Google Play™ Movies or play  
any of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Samsung Apps: Connect to Samsung Apps and  
make your smart device even smarter. Simply and  
easily download an abundance of applications to  
your device such as games, news, reference, social  
networking, navigation, and more. A shortcut to  
Samsung Apps displays on the Home screen by  
Task manager: View and manage active  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on  
Words Free:PlayWordsWithFriendsfree, thenumber  
Search: Use the Google search engine to search the  
internet. Google Search displays on all Home  
World clock: View the date and time in any time  
Settings: Configure your device to your preferences.  
YouTube: View and upload YouTube videos, right  
Social Hub: Access your social networks, like  
Facebook, YouTube, and Twitter, all in one place. For  
Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users. For more  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3: Entering Text  
This section describes how to enter words, letters,  
punctuation and numbers when you need to enter text.  
Text Input Methods  
Your device offers three text input methods.  
Samsung Keypad  
Google voice typing: You can use your voice to enter text  
using the Voice input feature. Your device recognizes your  
speech and enters text for you. For more information, refer  
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keypad for text entry  
called the Samsung keypad. Use the keypad to enter letters,  
punctuation, numbers, and other characters into text entry  
fields or applications. Access the keypad by touching any  
text entry field.  
Samsung keypad: The Samsung keypad is also a virtual  
QWERTY keypad that allows you to enter text by touching keys on  
the screen. The Samsung keypad includes predictive text, which  
matches your key touches to common words so that you can  
select the word to enter it into your text.  
The keypad displays at the bottom of the screen. By default,  
when you rotate the device, the screen orientation updates to  
display the keypad at the bottom of the screen.  
Swype: Swype™ is a new text input method that allows you to  
enter words by gliding your finger over the virtual QWERTY  
keypad, lifting your finger between words. You can also enable  
Word prediction, which matches your key touches to common  
words.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
           
Changing the Input Method  
When entering text, you can select the text input method.  
Resize  
Keypad  
New  
Paragraph  
Delete  
Key  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch an input method to activate it.  
3. Touch  
to display that input method’s settings.  
Using the Samsung Keypad  
The Samsung keypad is a custom virtual QWERTY keypad,  
featuring predictive text. Input characters by touching the  
on-screen keys with your finger or use speech recognition.  
Shift  
Emoticons  
Clipboard  
Settings Select  
Language  
Space Bar  
Text Input Mode  
As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key  
touches to common words and displays them. Select a word  
from the display to insert it into your text. For more  
information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive Text” on page 45.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Keypad  
To configure the Samsung keypad to your preferences:  
Entering Symbols and Numbers  
To enter a number, touch  
123  
, then touch the corresponding  
key.  
Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
123  
To enter common symbols, touch  
to switch to Symbols  
then touch  
input methods pop-up.  
– or –  
next to Samsung keypad in the Set up  
mode, then touch the corresponding key.  
1/3  
There are three pages of symbols. Touch  
the next page.  
to switch to  
Touch  
Settings on the keyboard.  
Touch and hold a vowel key (A, E, I, O, U, or Y) or the C, N, or  
S key to open a small window where you can chose an  
accented vowel or other alternate letter. Slide to the letter  
until it is highlighted, and release.  
The Samsung keypad settings screen displays. For  
Touch and hold the Period key ( . ) to open a small window  
with a set of common symbols.  
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters  
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower  
Other Keypad Functions  
case alphabet letters by touching  
case, before touching the letter key(s).  
Shift to toggle the  
Touch  
to select the language, if more than one language  
Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode.  
has been set. The current language displays on the space  
bar.  
Caps  
Lock  
Touch  
Caps Lock to switch to ABC mode. When ABC mode  
Touch and hold the  
Emoticons key to open a small  
is enabled, the Shift key background turns blue.  
window with a set of Emoticons. Choosing a symbol with the  
Emoticons key causes the Emoticons key to default to that  
symbol until you chose another symbol.  
Touch  
to view the clipboard and manage saved text.  
Entering Text 44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Begin typing a word.  
Using XT9 Predictive Text  
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction  
and regional error correction, which compensates for users  
pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keypads.  
A list of word options displays.  
1. Touch  
then touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
next to Samsung keypad in the Set up  
input methods pop-up.  
– or –  
Touch  
Settings on the keyboard.  
The Samsung keypad settings screen displays.  
2. Touch the XT9 field so a green check mark appears  
next to the field.  
3. Touch the XT9 advanced settings field to modify XT9  
5. Touch  
and then touch Add word to register a new  
word to XT9.  
To add more words, see “Adding Words To Your Word  
List” on page 46.  
Note: The XT9 option is available only when ABC mode has  
been selected.  
6. Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used  
in portrait or landscape mode.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Words To Your Word List  
To add more word options:  
Editing Text  
You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting,  
copying, or pasting text. These operations can be performed  
within and across apps. However, some apps do not support  
editing some or all of the text displayed while others may  
offer their own way to select text.  
Editing Existing Text  
To edit text that you have entered:  
1. Touch  
then touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
next to Samsung keypad in the Set up  
input methods pop-up.  
– or –  
Touch  
Settings on the keyboard.  
The Samsung keypad settings screen displays.  
1. Touch the text at the point you want to edit.  
2. Touch XT9 advanced settings  
3. Touch Menu Add  
4. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the word.  
5. Touch Add  
XT9 my words.  
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
.
2. Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if  
necessary.  
.
3. Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly  
Deleting Words From Your Word List  
touching the  
Delete key.  
To delete words from your word list:  
1. Navigate to XT9 my words. For more information, refer  
Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text  
To select and copy, delete, or replace text:  
to “Adding Words To Your Word List” on page 46.  
1. Touch and hold the text or word you want to select.  
2. Touch  
3. Touch the existing words you want to delete or touch  
Select all, and then touch Delete  
4. Touch Delete  
Menu  
Delete.  
The selected text is highlighted with a  
each end of the selection.  
tab at  
.
2. Touch and drag either tab to select more or less text.  
.
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Pasting Text  
To paste previously copied text:  
Tip: Touch SELECT ALL in the Application bar to select all text  
in the field. Touch on another area of the screen or touch  
DONE to deselect the text.  
1. Touch the text at the point you want to paste the copied  
text.  
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
3. Depending on the action you want to take for the  
selected text, in the Application bar touch:  
• SELECT ALL to highlight all text in the field.  
• CUT to remove the selected text.  
2. Touch the Cursor.  
A pop-up displays.  
3. Touch PASTE in the pop-up.  
• COPY to save the selected text to the clipboard.  
– or –  
To paste text directly from the clipboard:  
1. Touch the  
Clipboard key to display the text saved  
Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the  
selection with what you type.  
to the clipboard.  
2. Touch a text block to paste that text where the Cursor is  
– or –  
positioned.  
Touch the  
Delete key to delete the selected text.  
Closing the Keypad  
To close the keypad:  
Touch  
Close Keypad.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Text Using Swype  
Swype™ is a new way to enter text on touch screens.  
Instead of touching each key, use your finger to trace over  
each letter of a word. For each word, place your finger on the  
first letter and glide to the subsequent letters, lifting on the  
last letter.  
New  
Paragraph  
Delete  
Key  
Language  
Shift  
Here are a few tips to get you started:  
Auto-spacing: When you finish a word, just lift your finger and  
start the next word.  
Resize  
Space Bar  
Swype  
Key  
Numeric  
Keypad  
Double letters: Just “scribble” on the key.  
Keypad  
Auto-capitalization: Swype recognizes and capitalizes the first  
word of sentences. If you want to capitalize a word that is not at  
the beginning of a sentence, just glide above the keypad before  
gliding over the next letter.  
Speech  
Recognition  
Symbols  
Keypad  
The following example shows how to enter the word “this”.  
Put your finger down on the “t” and, without lifting, glide it to  
the “h”, then to the “i”, then over to the “s”.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
   
Contractions: Swype recognizes most words that include an  
apostrophe, just swype the letters of the word, including the  
apostrophe.  
Entering Symbols and Numbers  
Using the Swype Keypad:  
Touch and hold on a key to enter the symbol or number at the top  
of the key.  
Punctuation: Touch and hold a key to view a punctuation menu  
and make a selection.  
Touch and hold on a key until a menu of all characters available  
on that key appears, then touch a character to enter it.  
Accented characters: Just glide through the letters of the word.  
Swype usually recognizes the word and correctly accents the  
letters.  
For more symbols, touch  
corresponding key.  
Shift, then touch the  
Error correction: If you make a mistake, double-tap on the word  
you want to change.  
Touch  
to switch to the numeric keypad and quickly  
123  
enter numbers and mathematical operators  
Touch to switch to the symbols keypad. Touch  
additional symbols.  
Touch to display the alphabetic keypad.  
.
Configuring Swype  
Configure Swype to your preferences.  
to view  
ABC  
While entering text, touch and hold the  
Swype Key  
to display the Settings screen. For more information,  
Using Swype Speech Recognition  
Enter text by speaking. Swype recognizes your speech and  
enters text for you.  
Swype Help  
You can get tips and help about using Swype.  
Touch  
. At the Speak now prompt, speak the text  
you want to enter.  
1. Touch and hold the  
Swype Key.  
The Swype Settings screen displays.  
2. Touch How to Swype and then touch the desired topic.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing Keypad  
The Editing Keypad provides a quick way to move the cursor  
and highlight text. If the application in which you are working  
supports editing, you can cut, copy, or paste highlighted text.  
Using Speech Recognition  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input  
feature, which lets you enter text by speaking. The Samsung  
keypad recognizes your speech and enters text for you.  
To display the Editing keypad:  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
1. Swype from the  
Numeric Key  
Swype Key to the  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
.
123  
2. Touch Google voice typing to enable Voice Input  
.
The Editing keypad displays.  
3. At the Listening prompt, speak clearly and distinctly  
into the microphone.  
The software converts your voice to text, which is  
displayed in the message.  
4. Keep speaking to add more test.  
5. Touch Done to display the Samsung keypad.  
2. Touch an edit key.  
3. Touch  
to resize the Editing Keypad for easier use.  
Note: The Speech Recognition feature works best when you  
break your message down into smaller segments.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
   
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts  
This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts.  
Setting Up Your Accounts  
Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the  
Accounts and sync setting.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts  
Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With  
synchronization, information on your device is updated with  
any information that changes in your accounts.  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and sync.  
Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts.  
LinkedIn: Add your LinkedIn account to sync data with LinkedIn.  
Twitter: Add your Twitter Social Network Service to sync and  
access your data.  
2. Touch  
Add account, then touch the account type.  
3. Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to  
complete the set-up process.  
4. The device communicates with account servers to set  
up your account. When complete, your account  
displays in the Manage accounts area of the Accounts  
and sync screen.  
Server: Add a server to sync and access your data.  
Email: Add and Email account to sync Contacts. For more  
Google: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts, Calendar,  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to  
sync Contacts, Calendar, and Email.  
Contacts  
Store contact information for your friends, family, and  
colleagues to quickly access information or to send a  
message.  
To access Contacts:  
Samsung account: Add your Samsung account. For more  
From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
.
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Phone: Enter a telephone number, then touch the  
tab to choose a label from Mobile Home Work Work Fax  
Home Fax Pager Other Custom to create a custom label, or  
Callback  
• Email: Enter an email address, then touch the  
to choose a label from Home Work Other, or Custom to  
create a custom label.  
• Address: Enter an address, then touch the  
choose a label from Home Work Other, or Custom to create  
Label  
Creating Contacts  
,
,
,
,
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
,
,
,
Contacts  
.
.
2. Touch Device or an account.  
Label tab  
3. Touch the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the  
,
,
contact.  
• Picture: Choose a photo from the Gallery.  
Take picture: Display the Camera and take a photo of the  
contact.  
Label tab to  
,
,
a custom label.  
4. Touch contact fields to display the keyboard and enter  
information:  
• Events: Touch  
to display an event label and field. Enter  
the event date, then touch the  
from Birthday Anniversary  
custom event. Touch  
Label tab to choose a label  
Tip: Touch the screen and swipe up or down to display  
additional fields or touch Next on the keyboard to move to  
the next field.  
,
,
Other, or Custom to create a  
to add additional events.  
• Groups: Touch this field to display the Select group screen. To  
assign the contact to one or more groups, touch the check box  
next to each group. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box. For more information about Groups,  
• Name: Enter a first name for the contact. Touch  
Name prefix First name Middle name Last name, and  
Name suffix  
to enter a  
,
,
,
.
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
   
5. Touch  
unused field.  
6. Touch Add another field to add these additional fields:  
Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname,  
Internet call, and Relationship  
Back to remove the keyboard.  
to add additional fields.Touch  
to remove an  
Updating Contacts  
To update an existing contact:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
,
,
,
,
.
Contacts.  
Website  
,
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
7. Touch  
information.  
8. When you finish entering information, touch  
Save.  
3. Touch  
Edit.  
– or –  
4. Continue entering contact information. For more  
Touch  
Cancel  
OK to cancel and discard  
changes.  
Deleting Contacts  
To delete a contact:  
Tip: Display a contact’s record and touch the Email field to  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information, and then touch Delete. At the prompt,  
touch OK  
Apps  
send an email, touch the Address field to display the  
address on a map, or touch the Website field to link to the  
website.  
.
.
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For  
• Contacts: Show all your contacts. Touch the Find contacts  
field and enter a keyword to list contacts that contain that  
keyword.  
Managing Photo IDs  
To remove or update a contact’s Photo ID:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Contacts  
.
2. Touch  
Edit  
.
3. From the Contacts list, touch  
Menu to display all or  
3. Touch the Photo ID, then touch Remove  
picture  
Contacts Display Options  
There are various ways to display your Contacts and general  
Contacts settings.  
,
Picture, or Take  
some of these options:  
• Delete contacts. Touch and check mark the box next to each  
contact you want to delete. Touch Delete and then touch OK  
.
.
• Merge with Google: Merges the current contact with your  
Google account contacts.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
• Send email: Sends an email to the selected contact.  
• History: Displays information about the selected contact.  
• Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For  
• Mark as default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for  
example, touch the field that should be the default value.  
• Share namecard via: Shares the selected namecard using  
Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or through Wi-Fi Direct.  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Groups  
,
Favorites, or Contacts, above the  
Contacts List, to view contacts various ways:  
• Groups: Displays the possible Groups, such as Not assigned,  
Co-workers, Family, Friends, and so on. The number of  
contacts in the group is displayed next to the group name.  
Touch a group name to show only contacts in that group. For  
• Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and  
then touch Print. You can only print on a Samsung printer.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
   
• Contacts to display: Select the contacts you want to display in  
this inbox (All contacts, Google, Device, or Customized list).  
• Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts  
from, or export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a  
Send contact: Sets parameters for sending contact  
information:  
- Send all namecards: Allows you to transmit all of your  
current Contact entries at a single time. If the recipient device  
does not support this feature, some or all Contact entries might  
not be received.  
- Send individual contacts and namecards: Allows you to  
transmit single contacts, one at a time. The recipient must  
accept each namecard as it is received. This method of  
transmission ensures all contacts are received.  
• Accounts: Displays the Accounts and sync screen so you can  
manage or synchronize this account.  
• Settings: Configure contact settings:  
Only contacts with phones: Touch to check the box to only  
4. From the Groups list, select a group and then touch  
Menu to display these Group-specific options:  
• Search: Search the group for a contact.  
display contacts that have phone numbers.  
List by: List contacts by First name or Last name  
Display contacts by: Display contact names as First name or  
Last name first  
.
• Delete: Touch one or more groups and touch  
Delete.  
.
• Edit: Change the Group name or touch Add member to add or  
delete group members.  
• Add member: Add a new member to this group.  
• Remove member: Remove a selected member from this  
group.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the  
Joining Contacts  
group, touch and check mark the box next to each contact you  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
want to send to, or touch Select all, and touch  
Done  
.
Contacts.  
Touch Compose Email or Compose Gmail as the method for  
sending the email.  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
• Change order: Changes the order of how the groups display.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Join contact.  
4. Touch the contact you want to Join.  
The joined contact’s information is displayed with the  
original contact’s information.  
Linked Contacts  
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts,  
including Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email  
providers. When you synchronize contacts from these  
accounts with your device, you may have multiple contacts  
for one person.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to join other contacts.  
Separating Contacts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to  
see all the contact’s numbers and addresses together in one  
contact entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts  
updated, because any changes that your contacts make to  
their information in the respective accounts is automatically  
updated the next time you synchronize with the account.  
Contacts  
.
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
3. Touch  
A list of Joined contacts displays.  
4. Touch OK to separate a joined contact.  
The contact is removed from the list.  
Menu  
Separate contact.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
       
Sharing Contact Information  
You can send a contact’s information by way of Bluetooth to  
other Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an  
attachment.  
• Wi-Fi Direct: To send Contacts entries directly to an external  
device through a Wi-Fi connection  
4. Follow the prompts to send the contact information.  
Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all  
devices support transfers of multiple contacts. Check  
the target device’s documentation.  
Importing and Exporting Contacts  
To back up and restore your contacts information, you can  
export your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or  
import your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage  
device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Contacts  
.
1. Use the USB cable to connect your device to the  
storage device.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Share namecard via.  
Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
information with others.  
Contacts  
.
3. Touch  
Menu  
Import/Export  
.
3. At the prompt, choose a sending method. Options are:  
4. Touch Import from USB storage  
,
Export to USB storage,  
or Send namecard via, then follow the prompts to  
complete the operation.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Renaming a Group  
To rename a group that you created:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Groups  
Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts  
faster or to quickly send messages to group members.  
Apps  
Contacts.  
Creating a New Group  
Create a new group when you add or edit a contact.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group you want to  
rename.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to enter a  
new Group name  
5. Touch Save to save the new group name.  
Apps  
3. Touch  
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to enter a  
new Group name  
5. Touch Save to save the new group name.  
Menu  
Edit.  
.
.
.
.
Deleting Groups  
To delete a group that you created:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just touch  
Contacts.  
the contact’s Groups field and touch each group.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch any group you want to  
delete.  
Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to  
display only the contacts in that group. For more information,  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Delete.  
The groups that can be deleted display.  
Contacts and Accounts  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch Select all  
each group to delete.  
5. Touch Delete to delete the groups. Choose from  
,
Starred in Android, or the name of  
Removing Group Members  
To remove contacts from a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Group only or Group and group members.  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group from which you  
Adding Group Members  
To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contact’s Group field.  
want to remove members.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
Menu  
Remove member.  
To add multiple contacts to a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
Contacts are removed from the group and the group  
name is removed from each contact’s Group field.  
.
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group to which you  
Favorites  
want to add members.  
Mark contact records with a  
gold star to identify them as  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Add member.  
favorites.  
The contacts that can be added display.  
Adding Favorites  
To add a contact to the Favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to add.  
5. Touch  
Done to add the contacts to the group.  
Apps  
Contacts  
.
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact name so that it  
.
Removing Favorites  
To remove one or more contacts from your favorites list:  
turns gold  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch Menu Remove from favorites  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
To remove one contact from your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Contacts  
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
Apps  
Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred  
.
status.  
.
Accessing Favorites  
You can view your favorites two ways for fast viewing or  
messaging.  
To view your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch  
Starred in Android  
Apps  
.
.
.
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact’s name so that it  
– or –  
turns gray  
to remove it from the Favorites list.  
Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
Only your starred contacts display.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Section 5: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive messages  
and other features associated with messaging.  
Gmail  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
email.  
Types of Messages  
Your device supports these types of messages:  
Tip: To set up your Google account on your device, use  
Gmail: Send and receive Gmail from your Google account.  
Email: Send and receive email from your email accounts,  
including Corporate Exchange mail.  
Google Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
Google Messenger  
:
Use Google Messenger to bring groups of  
Setting Up Your Gmail Account  
If you did not set up a Google account during the initial  
configuration, the first time you launch Gmail, your device  
prompts you to set up your Google account.  
friends together into a simple group conversation.  
Note: Your Wi-Fi-only device does NOT support voice calling  
and messaging services. Please disregard any “dial”  
and “message” related menus because some Gmail  
options are identically set in all Android devices.  
Note: You can use more than one Google account on your  
device. To add another account, touch  
Settings ADD ACCOUNT  
Menu  
.
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
Refreshing Your Gmail Account  
Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
servers.  
2. Touch Existing to sign in to an existing account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail  
Gmail  
.
.
At the Sign in screen, use the on-screen keyboard to enter  
your Google Email name and Password, then touch Sign in  
2. Touch Refresh in the Application Bar.  
.
Managing Your Gmail Account  
Use menu options to manage your Gmail account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu for these options:  
• Manage labels: Determine settings for each label.  
– or –  
Touch New to create a new account.  
Apps  
At the Your name screen, enter your first and last name, and  
touch Next  
.
At the Create email address screen, follow the prompts to  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
create a new account.  
The Backup and restore screen displays.  
3. Read the backup and restore information, touch the  
• Send Feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
option to enable or disable it, and then touch Next  
.
4. The device communicates with the Google server to set  
up your account and synchronize your email. When  
complete, your Gmail displays in the Inbox.  
Messaging  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing Your Gmail Conversations  
In addition to managing your Gmail account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Gmail  
conversations in an account.  
Tip: To move a conversation to another folder, touch and drag  
it to the folder tab.  
3. Touch  
• Add star  
Menu for these options:  
Remove star: Mark (or unmark) conversations with  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
/
2. Touch the gray box to the left of one or more  
a yellow star. Starred conversations are listed in the Starred  
conversations and then choose one of the following  
options:  
folder. Touch  
DONE to remove check marks.  
• Mark important  
importance indicator  
/
Mark not important: Change the  
• Archive  
conversations are assigned to the All Mail folder.  
• Delete : Delete the conversations. Deleted conversations  
are moved to the Trash folder.  
• Change labels : Relocate the conversations to the Inbox  
Personal Receipts Travel, or Work folder and then touch OK  
• Mark as Read Mark as Unread : Mark the  
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
: Archive the conversations. Archived  
. Yellow indicates important.  
• Mute: New messages added to muted conversations bypass  
your inbox so that the conversation stays archived in the All  
Mail folder.  
,
• Report spam: Report the conversations as spam, which are  
emails that violate the Gmail Program Policies and/or Terms of  
Use.  
,
,
.
/
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
marked as read, it has a gray background. Touch  
to remove the check marks.  
DONE  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Touch SEND to send this message.  
Composing and Sending Gmail  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Compose  
.
Touch SAVE DRAFT to save a draft of this message.  
3. Touch the To field to enter recipients. As you enter  
Gmail Account Settings  
names or email addresses, matching contacts display.  
Touch a contact to add it to the field.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Settings for settings:  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
5. Touch Compose email to enter the text of your email.  
6. While composing a message, the following options are  
displayed:  
General settings  
• Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Delete actions.  
• Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm archiving actions.  
• + CC/BCC: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the  
message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients.  
• Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Send actions.  
Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the  
message.  
7. Touch  
• Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or  
archive a conversation.  
Menu for the following options:  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
• Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.  
• Clear search history: Remove previous searches you  
performed.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
• Hide pictures in messages: Stops pictures from displaying  
automatically in messages until you allow it for a sender.  
Messaging  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(Gmail account settings)  
• Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing  
messages.  
Each account has independent settings:  
• Gmail sync is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have Gmail  
synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and  
sync settings. Touch to open those settings.  
• Days of mail to sync: Set the number days to sync email for  
this Gmail account.  
• Priority Inbox: This setting is only available if you have  
configured Gmail on the web to show Priority Inbox. If available,  
you can set Priority Inbox as the conversation list to open when  
you have new mail, rather than Inbox.  
• Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
• Manage labels: Choose which labels are synchronized.  
• Download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of  
files attached to recent messages when connected through  
Wi-Fi.  
• Ringtone & vibrate: If Email notifications is enabled, touch this  
field to set the following options:  
Sync messages: Sync options are: None, Last 30 days, or All.  
Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
About Gmail  
Displays information about the Gmail (Version, copyright  
information, Send feedback, Report a problem, Open source  
licenses, Privacy Policy).  
Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications or use  
the default ringtone and then touch OK  
.
Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status  
Bar for new email, not for every new message.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent  
to this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push  
(Automatic), Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or  
12 hours.  
Email  
Use Email to view and manage all your email accounts in one  
application.  
Configuring Email Accounts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
• Period to sync email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set  
whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month of  
email on the tablet.  
Apps  
Email.  
2. At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and  
Password, then touch Next  
.
• Emails retrieval size: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB,  
or All.  
3. Your account’s incoming server settings are different  
depending on the kind of email service for the account.  
If you are asked What type of account?, touch the type  
• Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for  
this account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1,  
3, or 6 months, or All calendar.  
of account: POP3 account  
,
IMAP account, or Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync  
.
The Server settings screen displays. Enter the required  
• Send email from this account by default: When enabled,  
email from your device is automatically sent from this account.  
• Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive  
notifications when you receive new email sent to this account.  
• Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
4. Review the Account options screen. Available options  
vary, depending on the provider:  
• Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to  
this account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic),  
Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
Messaging  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Sync calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, use  
Menu Settings. Touch the account to display  
• Sync task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Account settings.  
• Automatically download attachments when connected to  
Wi-Fi: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to  
recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.  
5. Touch Next to go to the next screen or touch Previous to  
go to the Apps screen.  
Adding Additional Email Accounts  
To add additional email accounts:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings  
3. Enter the Email address Password, and so on.  
Apps  
Email  
.
.
Add account  
.
,
Managing Your Email Accounts  
You can view email you receive for all accounts in the  
Combined view screen or you can view email accounts  
individually.  
Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device  
administrator? screen may appear. Read the information  
and touch Activate to continue.  
6. Enter an account name for the email account just  
added, which is displayed on the email screen, and  
enter Your name, if required.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch the drop-down menu at the top left of the  
screen to select:  
• Combined view: View all email in a combined inbox.  
Account Name>: View email for the account.  
Apps  
Email  
7. Touch Done  
.
The device communicates with the appropriate server  
to set up your account and synchronize your email.  
When complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the  
account.  
<
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
Managing Your Email Conversations  
• Sort by: Choose a method for listing your email conversations.  
• View mode: Choose how to view your email conversations.  
Choices are: Standard view and Conversations view.  
• Create folder: Create a new main folder or touch an existing  
folder to create a sub-folder.  
In addition to managing your Email account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Email  
conversations in an account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
2. Touch the box to the left of one or more conversations  
and then choose one of the following options:  
Note: This option is not available for all email accounts.  
• Settings: Display the settings for this email account. For more  
• Star  
: Mark the conversations with a gold star and list  
them in the Starred folder. Touch  
to make the changes.  
– or –  
Flag  
• Delete all: Delete all items for this email account.  
• New meeting invitation: Use S Planner to add an event or add  
: Touch Clear to clear all flags and check marks, touch  
Complete to mark all conversations with a blue check mark, or  
touch Set to set all flags. Set flags are gold.  
• Mark as Read  
/
Mark as Unread  
: Mark the  
Composing and Sending Email  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
marked as read, it has a gray background.  
Apps  
Email.  
• Move to  
:
Relocate the conversations to another folder in  
2. Touch an account, if you have more than one account  
set up, then touch Compose  
3. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.  
the current email account or in a folder within another email  
account.  
.
• Delete  
: Delete the conversations.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients,  
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as  
many message recipients as you want.  
Messaging  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch  
to add a contact to the field.  
Undo: Erase the previous input.  
Touch +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients.  
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
Redo: Restore the previously erased input.  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
Insert: Choose an item to insert into the  
message from the listed apps, such as  
Images, Memo, Contacts, and so on.  
Touch +Me to add yourself as a recipient.  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
5. Touch the body of the email to enter the text of your  
email.  
Insert quick response: Insert text that you  
frequently use in emails. For more  
6. While composing a message, the following options  
may be displayed:  
Priority: Set the email priority. Options are:  
High, Normal, or Low.  
Font size: Choose a text font size of 9, 10,12,  
14, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 36 points.  
Tracking options: Touch Read receipt or  
Delivery receipt and then touch OK to set the  
tracking options for this email.  
Bold: Bold the following text. Touch again to  
turn off bold.  
Italics: This action italicizes the subsequent  
entered text.  
Security options: Set the email security  
options. Options are: Encrypt and Sign.  
Font color: Set the color of the text font. The  
bar changes to the selected color.  
Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the  
message from the listed apps, such as My  
Files, Images, Video, Audio, and so on.  
Background color: Set the color of the  
background of the email.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Touch  
Save to save the email to the Drafts folder,  
Delete to delete the  
• Confirm deletions: Touch the box to enable or disable this  
Send to send the email, or  
email.  
option. A check mark  
confirmed.  
indicates that deletions must be  
• Quick responses: Edit text that you frequently use in emails.  
Touch an email account to display the following  
settings:  
Account Settings  
Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your  
device.  
Common settings  
Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and  
include setting how much email to synchronize, creating  
signatures for email you send, and other handling  
options.  
• Account name: Enter a name to identify this account.  
Your name: Enter a name to be used on emails.  
• Add signature: Touch the box to enable or disable this option.  
A check mark  
indicates that the following signature is  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch General  
Preferences. The following options display:  
Apps  
Email.  
added to emails.  
• Signature: Enter a signature to add to email from this account.  
• Default account: When enabled, email from your device is  
automatically sent from this account.  
• Display after deleting message: Set the screen to show after  
deleting a message. Choices are: Next message, Previous  
message, or Message list.  
• Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email  
address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.  
• Message preview line: Choose a message preview line  
amount. Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines.  
• Email header: Set whether the Subject or Sender of the email  
is shown as the header.  
• Forward with files: Touch the check box to include any file  
attachments when you forward an email.  
Messaging  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Recent messages: Limit the number of recent messages that  
are displayed on your device. Options are: 25, 50, 75, 100,  
200, or Total.  
• Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule  
controls, which determines when your tablet checks the email  
service for new email.  
• Show images: Display images in an email.  
Data usage  
• Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a  
defined period of time, while you are unable to check your  
email.  
• Sync email: Touch the box to enable or disable this option. A  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size,  
which ranges from 0.5 KB to 100 KB or allow All email to be  
retrieved.  
check mark  
indicates email sync is enabled.  
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email  
sent to this account during. Options are: Never, every 5, 10, 15,  
or 30 minutes, every hour, every 4 hours, or once a day.  
• Auto download attachments: Enable or disable  
auto-download of files attached to recent messages when  
connected through Wi-Fi.  
• Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your  
account are synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
• Security options: Set various security options for the account.  
• In case of sync conflict: Set whether to update the server or  
your tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.  
• Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times.  
Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10, 20, 50, or 100 KB,  
or All.  
Notification settings  
Exchange ActiveSync settings  
• Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon  
appears in the Status Bar when a new email arrives.  
• Select ringtone: Not available for this device.  
• Vibrate: Not available for this device.  
• Period to sync email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1  
or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet.  
• Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete  
the contents in the server trash.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server settings  
Incoming Server Settings  
Your account’s exchange or incoming server settings are  
different, depending on the kind of email service for the  
account: POP3, IMAP, or Exchange ActiveSync.  
• Exchange server settings: Configure incoming server  
settings.  
– or –  
Domain\ user name: If your Exchange ActiveSync server requires  
that you specify a domain, enter it before the backslash.  
Otherwise, just enter your username (the part before  
@emailprovider.com in your email address) after the backslash.  
The backslash is optional when only entering your username. The  
Email app enters the correct syntax for domains and usernames  
when communicating with the server.  
Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more  
• Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For  
• Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
Password: The password for your email account, which should be  
filled in.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
• Sync calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Exchange server / IMAP server: The fully resolved domain  
name of your email service provider’s server, for example,  
mail.emailprovider.com.  
• Sync task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s tasks.  
Use secure connection (SSL) / Security type: Check this option if  
your server requires you to connect to the server securely, or if  
you prefer to connect securely.  
Messaging  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use client certificate: Use a client certificate for messaging  
security.  
Require sign-in: Check this option to enter a username and  
password for your SMTP server, if your email service provider  
requires that you enter them to send email.  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
IMAP path prefix: Enter an IMAP path prefix, if required.  
User name: Your username on the SMTP server (this may not be  
the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for  
incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
Password: Your password on the SMTP server (this may not be the  
same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail).  
Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
Outgoing Server Settings  
If you use an IMAP or POP3 account for receiving email, you  
typically use an SMTP server to send email from that  
account. Exchange ActiveSync accounts do not have  
separate outgoing server settings.  
Google Talk  
Talk is Google’s instant messaging and audio and video chat  
service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with  
other people who also use Google Talk on another Android  
tablet or phone or on a computer.  
SMTP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email  
service provider’s SMTP server, for example,  
smtp.emprovider.com.  
Security type: Select the security type required by your email  
service provider. Select the SLL (Accept all certificates) option  
for your security type to accept a server certificate from your  
SMTP server that is self-signed, out of date, or in some other way  
not accepted by the Email application.  
Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up  
your Google account on your device use Accounts and  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Your friend’s address in Talk is a Gmail or other email  
address that is configured to connect to Google Talk.  
Open Talk and Sign In  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Talk.  
If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Add a  
Google Account screen displays.  
If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to  
your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others  
status in Talk and other applications.  
2. Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account,  
or New to create a Google account.  
View and Accept an Invitation to Become a  
Friend  
When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk,  
you receive a  
invitation displays in your Friends list.  
1. Touch the invitation.  
notification in the System Bar and the  
Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are  
automatically logged in. Just touch the account.  
2. Touch Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and  
chat, Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share  
your Google Talk status with the sender right now, or  
Block, if you do not want to receive any more  
invitations from that person.  
Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen  
displays.  
Invite a Friend to Chat  
You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your  
friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and  
view each other’s online status.  
If you touch Accept, the friend is added to your Friends  
list in Talk and you can share your status in Talk and  
other applications.  
1. While viewing your Friends list, touch  
Add friend.  
2. Enter your friend’s address and touch DONE  
.
Messaging  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• End chat: End this chat session.  
Talk Options  
• Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether  
you want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.  
• Friend info: Display information about the friend with which  
you are chatting. The following options are also displayed:  
There are several options that are available while viewing  
your Friends list and some that are only available while you  
are chatting.  
1. Touch  
to search your Talk messages or the current  
message for a word. Use the on-screen keyboard to  
BLOCK: Keeps this person from sending you messages and  
removes the person from your Friends list.  
enter a search term. Touch  
search your Talk messages.  
on the keyboard to  
REMOVE: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their  
invitation. However, the friend is not blocked.  
2. Touch  
to invite another friend to chat,  
to  
invite a friend to video chat, or  
voice chat.  
to invite a friend to  
Note: If you touch the REMOVE option, touch  
Add friend  
Send chat invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.  
3. Touch a Friend’s entry to display the Chat entries for  
that Friend.  
• Add to chat: Choose another friend to invite to this  
conversation.  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options,  
which are available while viewing your Friends list and  
some that are only available while you are chatting.  
• Display options: To set the way your friends list is sorted,  
• Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your  
device.  
• Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more  
information, refer to “Google Talk Settings” on page 76.  
• Help: Displays additional help information.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
touch Availability Name, or Recency.  
,
• End all chats: End all chats in which you are engaged.  
• Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main  
screen.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAT NOTIFICATIONS  
Google Talk Settings  
Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If  
you have more than one account, each maintains its own  
Talk settings.  
• IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a  
notification in the System Bar, or neither, when you receive a  
text chat.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch an account for  
options:  
GENERAL  
Apps  
Talk.  
• Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive a text chat.  
• Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only  
when silent, or Never.  
• Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an  
android next to your name in their Friends list when you are  
signed into Google Talk on a tablet or phone.  
• Away when screen off: Check to change your Talk status to  
Away when your screen turns off. When unchecked, your  
status is not changed.  
VOICE & VIDEO CHAT  
• Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or  
display a notification in the System Bar when you are invited to  
a video chat.  
• Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive an invitation to a video chat.  
• Invitation notifications: Show notification when a friend  
invitation arrives.  
• Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only  
when silent, or Never.  
• Default video effect: Set the video image stabilization.  
Messaging  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACCOUNT  
Messenger  
• Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked.  
Touch a blocked friend and then touch OK to unblock the  
friend.  
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation, putting everyone  
on the same page. When you get a new conversation in  
Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device.  
• Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous  
searches are shown until you search for new words.  
• Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. For  
To get started, touch the Messenger icon on the home screen  
of the Google+ app or use the Messenger icon on your  
Applications screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
The Messenger screen displays.  
Apps  
.
ABOUT  
Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and  
privacy policies.  
2. Touch Learn more in the center of the screen and then  
touch a topic to learn more about using Google  
Messenger.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 6: Internet and Social Networking  
This section describes the various Internet and social  
networking applications available on your device such as  
Google+, Internet, Latitude, Local, Maps, Navigation, Google  
Play™ Books, Google and Voice Search, and YouTube.  
To get started:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google+  
The Google+ home screen displays.  
2. Touch Menu Help and then touch a topic to  
learn more about using Google+.  
Apps  
.
Google+  
Share updates and see what is going on around you with  
Google+ for mobile.  
Internet  
Share your thoughts and location.  
Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows  
you to access the Internet.  
Instantly upload your photos and videos as you take them.  
Get updates from your circles in the stream.  
Check in to a place.  
Tip: Internet displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the  
Home screen.  
Make plans on-the-go with group messaging.  
View posts from people around you.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Internet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Internet.  
The Most visited screen displays.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
             
Touching and Dragging  
Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and  
to reposition pages within the screen.  
Entering Text in a Field  
While browsing, touch a text field to display the virtual QWERTY  
keyboard to enter text.  
Zoom  
Tap the screen twice to zoom in or out.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to zoom out by making an  
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom  
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.  
Navigating the Internet  
The following options are available for Internet navigation.  
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to  
Command Keys  
landscape mode.  
Touch  
Back or  
to return to the previous page.  
Touch and hold  
Back to display browser History. For more  
Selecting Items On a Page  
While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:  
Touch an item to select it.  
Touch  
Touch  
Forward to go forward to a recent page.  
Touch a hyperlink to follow the link.  
Refresh to reload the current page.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:  
3. To switch to another open window, touch its tab at the  
top of the screen.  
Open: Open the linked page.  
Open in new window: Open a new window to display the linked  
page.  
4. To delete an open window, touch the tab at the top of  
the screen, and then touch  
Entering a URL  
Access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet  
.
Save link: Save the linked page to Download history.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard.  
.
Touch and hold an image for the additional options:  
Save image: Download an image. View downloaded images in  
Gallery.  
2. Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter  
the URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard.  
Copy image: Copy an image to the clipboard.  
View image: View the image source.  
Set as wallpaper: Use the image as your home screen  
wallpaper.  
As you enter characters, potential matches display.  
Note: Use the  
necessary.  
Delete key to clear the URL field, if  
Using Browser Windows  
You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily  
3. Touch a match to complete the URL.  
– or –  
switch between windows.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. To open a new window, touch  
screen.  
Internet  
.
Continue entering characters and touch the Go key to  
load the page.  
at the top of the  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
3. Touch and hold on the link or URL, then touch Copy link  
URL on the pop-up menu.  
Copying Fields or Text  
Copy information from a webpage to the clipboard for  
pasting, searching, or sharing.  
Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
4. To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired  
field (or to another application), then touch and hold in  
a text field and touch Paste on the pop-up menu.  
Internet.  
2. Browse to a webpage.  
Using Bookmarks  
While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later.  
Creating a bookmark  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
3. On the webpage, touch and hold on the text until you  
see the text you want highlighted, then stop touching  
the screen.  
Internet  
.
The text is highlighted.  
2. Browse to a website, then touch  
Add bookmark  
.
4. Touch and drag the  
tabs to the left or right to  
The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the  
select more or less text.  
Name and URL Address for the bookmark.  
5. Touch Copy at the top of the screen to copy the  
selected text or touch Done to stop.  
3. In the Account field, touch the drop-down menu, and  
touch Local or an account.  
6. To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field  
(or to another application), then touch and hold in a text  
field and touch Paste in the pop-up.  
4. In the Add to field, touch the drop-down menu, and  
touch Homescreen  
5. Touch OK to save the bookmark.  
A gold star displays on the Bookmarked page.  
,
Bookmarks, or a folder.  
Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet.  
2. Browse to a webpage.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing Bookmarks and History  
Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages.  
4. On the History tab, touch Today  
,
Yesterday, Last month,  
Older, or Most visited to use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Bookmarks History, and Saved pages  
3. On the Bookmarks tab, use these options:  
Internet.  
Touch the  
star  
next to a page to bookmark it. Touch a gold  
next to a page to remove the bookmark.  
,
.
Touch and hold on a page for these options:  
Touch a bookmark to load the page.  
Open: Open the webpage.  
Touch and hold on a bookmark for these options:  
Open in new tab: Launch the webpage in a new window.  
Open: Open the bookmarked page.  
Add bookmark/Remove from Bookmarks: Bookmark the  
page or remove the bookmark for this page.  
Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub,  
or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link.  
Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window.  
Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description.  
Add shortcut to home: Create a bookmark on the Home  
screen.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Remove from history: Remove the record of this page.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub,  
or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
5. On the Saved pages tab, use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
Touch and hold on a page and then touch Delete saved page  
to remove the page from Saved pages.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
 
Settings: Configure web settings. For more information, refer to  
“Internet Settings” on page 83.  
Internet Menu  
While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu for the following  
options:  
Internet Settings  
Use the browser settings to customize the browser.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
New tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a new tab.  
New incognito tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a  
new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not  
appear in your browser history or search history. See the  
Internet  
.
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu  
Settings.  
Customize the Browser by using the following options:  
on-screen explanation of going incognito  
.
General  
Add shortcut to home: Add the URL for this webpage as a  
shortcut on the first home screen.  
• Set home page: View and set the default first page that  
displays when you launch Internet.  
Share page: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub, or  
Wi-Fi Direct to send the webpage URL.  
• Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete  
Internet forms with a single click.  
Find on page: Search for content on the current page.  
Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified  
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a  
website the same way it would appear on a PC.  
Save for offline reading: Saves the webpage so you can read it  
later even when offline.  
• Auto-fill text: If Form auto-fill is enabled, set up the following  
information:  
Full name: Enter your name.  
Company name: Enter a company name.  
Address line 1: Enter your address.  
Address line 2: Enter any additional address information.  
City/Town: Enter your city and town.  
Downloads: View and manage recent downloads.  
Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
County: Enter your county.  
• Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites.  
• Remember passwords: When enabled, saves user names  
and passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.  
• Clear passwords: Clear all saved user names and passwords.  
Accessibility  
Zip code: Enter your ZIP code.  
Country: Enter your country.  
Phone: Enter your telephone number.  
Email: Enter a valid email address.  
Privacy and security  
• Force zoom: Override the website's request to control zoom.  
Text size: Use the Preview field and the following controls to  
configure text size:  
• Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the  
device.  
Scale text up and down: Scale the text size up or down using  
a slider bar.  
• Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages.  
• Show security warnings: When enabled, the browser warns  
you if there is a problem with a site’s security.  
• Accept cookies: When enabled, allows the browser to save  
and read cookie information used by webpages.  
• Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the  
device.  
Zoom amount on double tap: Set how much to zoom when  
you double-tap the screen, from 75 to 125 percent.  
Minimum font size: Set the minimum font size, which can  
range from 1 point to 24 points.  
• Inverted screen rendering: Use the Preview screen and the  
following controls to configure inverted screen rendering:  
• Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you  
enter into forms to make future forms easier.  
• Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.  
• Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request  
access to your location.  
Inverted rendering: Enable the display of websites with  
inverted colors – black becomes white and vice versa.  
Contrast: If Inverted rendering is enabled, use this slider to set  
the contrast, which can range from 100 to 300 percent.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Advanced  
Bandwidth management  
• Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google,  
Yahoo!, or Bing.  
• Preload search results: Enable the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches. Options are: Never, Only via Wi-Fi, or Always.  
• Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded  
when you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by  
a link, which you can touch to download the picture.  
Labs  
• Open in background: When enabled, new windows open  
behind the current window.  
• Enable JavaScript: When enabled, Internet automatically runs  
JavaScript scripts on pages you visit.  
• Enable plug-ins: When enabled, Internet automatically loads  
and runs plug-ins on pages you visit.  
• Quick controls: When enabled, the Application and URL bars  
are hidden. To access the hidden controls, swipe inward from  
the left or right edge of the screen to access Quick Controls. For  
• Website settings: View and manage settings for individual  
websites.  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
• Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview  
of newly-opened pages.  
• Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant  
when you use Google Search to show results as you type.  
Enabling this option can increase data use.  
• Auto-fit pages: When enabled, Internet automatically sizes  
webpages to fit your device’s display.  
• Block pop-ups: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.  
Text encoding: Choose a default character set for webpages.  
• Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to  
the factory defaults.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch  
Menu Settings Labs and touch Quick controls  
to uncheck it.  
Internet Quick Controls  
Use Quick Controls to maximize your viewing area while  
browsing the internet.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet  
Menu  
.
Latitude  
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Settings  
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
Labs, and then touch Quick controls to enable the  
function.  
The Application and URL bars are hidden.  
You must first set up your tablet to use wireless networks to  
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when  
Wi-Fi is enabled.  
3. Swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen  
to access quick controls.  
To enable Wi-Fi:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
.
2. Touch Location services  
A green check mark  
enabled.  
Use wireless networks.  
indicates the feature is  
3. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
4. Without lifting your finger, move to an option and then  
lift your finger to initiate the option.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
         
4. Log on to your Google account.  
4. At the Send sharing requests prompt, touch Yes.  
To create a Google account or set up your Google  
account on your device use Accounts and sync settings.  
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your  
location marked on a map. They will also receive instructions  
on how to view your location from the Internet or use  
Latitude on their device, if it is available. Once they  
acknowledge your request, their location will display on your  
tablet. They can share their location from their computer,  
phone, or tablet.  
5. Touch  
Home  
Apps  
Latitude.  
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30  
meters.  
For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude  
.
Sharing Your Location with Friends  
1. From the Latitude map screen, touch  
Latitude Menu  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Latitude  
Apps  
Latitude.  
to display your Latitude list of friends. At first, only your  
name is displayed.  
Latitude  
2. Touch  
, if necessary.  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Add friends.  
• Add friends: Share your location with friends. For more  
information, refer to “Sharing Your Location with  
Friends” on page 87.  
3. Touch Select from Contacts and touch a contact  
– or –  
Touch Add via email address, enter an email address,  
• Check in: Touch a location to check-in so others will know your  
and touch the Send key or close the keyboard and  
location.  
touch Add friends  
.
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Refresh friends: Update your Latitude list of friends.  
• Show stale friends / Hide stale friends: Show or hide friends  
depending on the accuracy of their Latitude information.  
• Location settings: Configures the location reporting settings.  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
“Local” on page 88. This option only displays in portrait  
mode.  
Local  
Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your  
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
The Local application allows you to find the best sources for  
business information across the web, including business  
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and  
other related information. Business owners can provide  
additional details, such as photos, hours of operation, and  
coupons.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Choose your location and touch My current  
location or Enter an address. To enter an address, use  
the on-screen keyboard and then touch OK  
• Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display. Choose from  
Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps,  
Bicycling, or Wikipedia. This option only displays in portrait  
mode.  
Apps  
Local.  
• Latitude: Allows you to find your friends and family on a map  
and share with people you choose.  
.
3. Touch one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
• My Places: Displays a list of starred and recently viewed  
places.  
All of the businesses in that category that are close to  
you display.  
• Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.  
• Help: Launches Google mobile Help.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
     
4. Touch a business in the list to see more details about it.  
The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
Navigating the Map  
Zooming  
Double-tap on the screen to zoom in.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to zoom out by making an  
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom  
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.  
5. Touch your location at the bottom of the Local pop-up  
to write a review, check in here, view reviews and  
details, or choose another location nearby.  
Maps  
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to  
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,  
and other location-based information.  
landscape mode.  
Scrolling  
Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on the main Home screen by  
Touch and drag on the screen to reposition the map in the display.  
Touch  
Touch an icon on the map to display information about the  
default.  
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some  
features require Standalone or Google location services.  
location. For example, your location is indicated by a flashing  
and a pop-up that displays your name.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Maps.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Maps.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maps Menu  
Tip: Local and Layers display in the Application Bar in  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. While viewing a map, touch  
options:  
Maps  
.
landscape mode.  
Menu for these  
Other Map Options  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
“Local” on page 88. This option only displays in portrait  
mode.  
Touch the indicated icon to use these additional Map options:  
SearchMaps:Usethekeyboardtoenteryourrequest  
to Search the map for a city, location, and so on.  
Suggestions are displayed as you type.  
• Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display. Choose from  
Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps,  
Bicycling, or Wikipedia. This option only displays in portrait  
mode.  
Speak: Just speak a city, location, and so on, to  
display.  
Compass: Set the map to always display north at the  
top of the screen or to automatically rotate like a  
compass, keeping north on the map facing north,  
andso on. Yourdevice mayhave tobe calibrated the  
first time you use this feature. Follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
• Join Latitude/Latitude: Join Latitude, to share your location  
with friends you choose and Google.  
• My Places: Display starred locations.  
• Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.  
Local: Launch the Local app. For more information,  
• Help: Learn about Google maps.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
Scale bar: If enabled, the scale bar is displayed on the map,  
which shows the scale of the map in feet and meters.  
Bubble action: Show a bubble action on bubbles. Options are:  
Get directions, Navigation (driving), Call, or Street view.  
Directions: Displays the Directions pop-up. Enter  
My Location and End point or touch the button to the  
right of the fields to choose your current location, a  
contact’s location, or to touch a point on the map.  
Touch the automobile, bus, bicycle, or walking icon  
for the appropriate directions. Then touch Go to  
display a list of directions. Touch the Directions list  
and scroll up or down. Touch an entry in the  
Directions list to show the point mentioned on the  
map.  
• Cache  
Clear map tile cache: Touch OK to clear map tile cache.  
• Location settings: These settings display if you have joined  
Latitude.  
Location reporting: To update your location automatically, set  
the following options:  
Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display.  
Choose from Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines,  
Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, or Wikipedia.  
• Detect your location: Enable or disable whether your  
location is updated automatically.  
• Set your location: Set your location manually.  
• Do not update your location: Your friends cannot see  
your automatic location.  
Maps Settings  
Use the Maps settings to customize your Maps application.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Maps  
2. Touch Menu Settings to set the following Maps  
options:  
• Display: Set the following Maps display options:  
.
Enable location history: This history is only seen by you.  
Manage your friends: Add or remove friends who can see  
your location.  
Sign out of Latitude: Signs you out of Latitude and launches  
the Maps application.  
Zoom Buttons: If enabled, the zoom in (+) and zoom out (-)  
buttons are displayed on the map.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic check-ins: Checks you in to places that you have  
designated.  
Navigation  
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get  
walking or driving directions.  
Check-in notifications: Enables notifications that suggest  
places to check in.  
Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use  
Manage your places: View and modify your automatic check-  
ins and muted places.  
Navigation.  
• Switch Account: Choose a different Google account. This  
option only appears if you have added more than one Google  
account on your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Navigation  
Apps  
.
2. Touch Accept to accept the Google Maps Navigation  
• Labs: Access experimental features.  
beta message.  
• What’s New: Link to Google Play Store where you can check  
for a Maps update.  
3. Touch  
in the Application bar and then touch either  
Driving or Walking to describe the type of directions  
you want.  
• About: View information about Maps.  
• Feedback: Display a Maps feedback form.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google  
Maps, including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal  
Notices, and Web History.  
4. Touch  
Map in the Application bar to see a map  
(Driving) or a satellite image (Walking) of your area.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
   
5. Touch  
• Route options: Set whether directions should Avoid  
highways and Avoid tolls  
• Settings: Display Navigation settings:  
Menu for the following options:  
7. While navigating, touch:  
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES: View information  
about the current route and alternate routes.  
.
DirectionsList:Viewdirectionsinastep-by-step  
list.  
Screen dimming: Enable or disable screen dimming, which  
lets the screen dim between instructions to save power.  
Terms, privacy & notices: View Google’s Terms and  
conditions, Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
SHOWMAP:Returntothemapviewafterviewing  
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES or the directions list.  
Layers: Choose map layers to display.  
• Help: Display Navigation help information.  
6. To find a destination, touch an option:  
• Speak destination: Say the name or address of your  
destination.  
Menu: To display these options:  
Turn off voice/Turn on voice: Enable or  
disable voice-guided prompts.  
• Type destination: Enter the destination.  
• Contacts: Choose a destination from a contact record.  
• Starred places: Choose destinations you have marked as  
favorites.  
Exit navigation: Close Navigation and  
discard route information.  
Search: Find a location.  
Set destination: Choose or enter a  
destination.  
• Recent destinations: Choose from recent destinations. This  
option is not available until a destination has been requested.  
Settings: Enable or disable screen dimming  
and view Google’s Terms and conditions,  
Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
Help: Display Navigation help information.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. To add more books to your library, touch SHOP in the  
Application bar.  
Play Books  
Use the Play Books app to read eBooks from the  
Internet-based Google Play™ Books service. Google  
eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your  
favorite books online and offline.  
A pop-up displays a link to the Google Play Terms of  
Service. Read the document and touch Accept  
.
Browse the selection of Google eBooks, which are  
arranged in categories like Featured, Top Selling, Top  
Rated, Top Free, and many more.  
You can read books online or mark them for availability  
offline, so you can read them when you have no Internet  
connection (such as on an airplane). You can also use Books  
as your starting point for browsing or searching for books on  
line.  
3. To find a book by title or author name, touch  
Search on the Play Books main screen or touch SHOP  
Search.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books  
Apps  
.
4. On the Play Books main screen, touch  
Menu for  
these options:  
The Google Play Books main screen displays.  
• Make available offline: Mark books to make them available  
offline. Touch below a book cover to mark it with a pin and  
. Just reverse this process to remove books  
Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google  
then touch  
from your device.  
• View as list / View as carousel: Set how you want to view  
your books.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
   
• Refresh: If a book in your library does not appear on your  
device, use this option to update the display.  
6. Touch  
Menu for these additional options:  
Flowing text: Display the pages of the book  
• Original pages  
/
in their original format or use your format settings.  
• About the book: Displays the Google Play description of the  
book.  
• Accounts: Set the account to use.  
• Help: Displays various Book help information. Touch Help  
Center to get additional Google Play Books information.  
5. Touch the cover of a book to start reading.  
• Share: Share the book by using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Reading a Book  
Once the book displays:  
1. Sweep across the screen to turn the page.  
2. Touch the screen to display or hide the following  
options.  
• Available offline: Touch the check box to make the book  
available offline.  
• Read aloud / Stop reading aloud: Touch to let your device  
read the book to you.  
• Help: Touch Help center  
link the appropriate website. Touch Terms of Service  
,
Contact us, or Report a problem to  
Privacy  
3. Touch  
for a table of contents.  
,
4. Touch  
to set THEME (day or night), BRIGHTNESS,  
Policy, or Open source licenses to read those documents. The  
Play Books version number is also displayed.  
TYPEFACE, LINE HEIGHT, TEXT ALIGNMENT, and FONT  
SIZE.  
7. Touch and drag the slider at the bottom of the page to  
display a different page, which is indicated by the  
pop-up.  
5. Touch  
Search on the Play Books main screen or  
Search  
touch SHOP  
.
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. To contact customer support, report an issue, and  
Suggestions display below the text entry area.  
display more Google eBooks information, from a Home  
3. Touch a suggestion to search for that term.  
screen, touch  
Apps  
Help  
Play Books  
– or –  
Menu  
.
Touch  
on the keyboard to start the search.  
Search  
A browser window displays the search results.  
Search the internet using the Google search engine.  
YouTube  
View and upload YouTube videos right from your device.  
Tip: The Google Search widget displays by default on all Home  
screens. For information about displaying widgets on the  
Tip: A shortcut to YouTube appears on the main Home screen  
by default.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
YouTube.  
– or –  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Search.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
YouTube.  
2. Use the keyboard to enter search criteria to display  
matching searches.  
– or –  
2. Touch the HOME tab to return to the main YouTube  
page.  
Touch  
and speak the search criteria slowly and  
3. Touch the BROWSE tab to browse videos by categories  
like Comedy, Education, Music, and so on. Touch the  
desired category to display video thumbnails.  
clearly. Google searches for the information and  
displays results.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
         
4. Touch the ACCOUNT tab to choose which Google  
account you would like to use or add an account. Once  
you are signed in, touch ACCOUNT to display your  
subscriptions, see your favorites, see you watch later  
list, manage your playlists, or upload a video.  
Options While Viewing a Video  
Use these options while viewing a video:  
1. Touch  
watch later list or your favorites, or add a new playlist.  
2. Touch Share (in landscape mode) or touch  
Menu Share (in portrait mode) to use  
Add to, which lets you add the video to your  
5. Touch  
enter a keyword or phrase to find a YouTube video.  
Touch on the keyboard to initiate the search.  
6. While browsing, touch Menu for these options:  
Search YouTube and use the keyboard to  
Wi-Fi Direct, Google+, Social Hub, Bluetooth, Email, or  
Gmail to send the video’s URL.  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Sign in / Sign out: Sign in, sign out, or add an account. You  
may have to sign in to use certain options.  
• Copy URL: Copy the URL of the video to the clipboard. For  
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
• Flag: Flag the video for YouTube review.  
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
7. Touch a video thumbnail to view the video.  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7: Music  
This section explains how to use the music features of your  
device including the Music app, the Music Player, and the  
Music Hub.  
Accessing the Music App  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music.  
Play Music App  
The Play Music app contains a music player that plays music  
and other audio files that you copy from your computer or store  
online.  
The Play Music app searches your online library and  
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists.  
This can take from a few seconds to several minutes,  
depending on the amount of new music added since  
you last opened the application.  
Note: Some options described in this manual may not be  
available until you sign in to your Google account.  
It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent  
music, organized by album.  
Google Play Music  
Google PlayTM Music is a new service from Google that gives  
you instant access to your personal music collection on the  
hassle of wires or syncing. For more information, visit  
music.google.com  
.
Music  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Swipe left or right to spin the carousel and browse  
through your new and recent music.  
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid,  
list, or carousel, depending on the view.  
3. Touch an album to open it.  
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens  
in the Music application by touching the Music  
Searching for Music  
To find music in your library:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
application icon  
bar.  
at the top-left of the Application  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
Changing Library View  
2. Touch  
Search  
.
You can change the way you view the contents of your  
library.  
3. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.  
Touch on the keypad to remove the keypad.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
.
2. Touch the name of the current view, such as Recent  
near the top-left of the Application bar.  
,
4. Touch a matching song to play it, touch a matching  
album, artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs, or  
3. Touch an option to set how you view your library.  
touch  
next to an item in the list to play it, add it to  
The choices are: Recent  
Playlists, or Genres  
,
Albums, Artists, Songs,  
a playlist, or shop for other music by the artist online.  
.
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Make available offline: In addition to playing the music that  
you add to your online library, you can play music stored on  
your device’s internal storage. Then you can listen to music  
when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some  
of your online music available offline. For more information,  
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
2. Touch  
Menu  
.
The following options display depending on the library  
view:  
• Offline music only: Display only the music that is available  
offline.  
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.  
• New playlist: Create a new playlist from the Playlist view. For  
• Hide labels / Show labels: Hide or show labels. This option is  
not available in all library views.  
• Settings: Displays the Settings screen. Choose a Google  
account to use to connect to Google PlayTM Music and set the  
Music settings as indicated on the screen. The Music app  
version is also displayed.  
• Hide now playing bar / Show now playing bar: Hide or show  
the Now Playing bar that displays at the bottom of the screen.  
You can return to the Now playing screen from other Music  
screens by touching the name of the current song in the Now  
Playing bar.  
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music  
application.  
Music  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Available offline: Touch the check box to make the album  
available offline.  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless  
• Make instant mix: Add an instant mix to Playlists based on the  
selected song.  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
playlist.  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the device  
to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on  
the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key  
to adjust playback volume.  
• More by artist: View any other music in your library by the  
artist that performs this song.  
• Shop for artist: Launches Google to search for more songs by  
the selected artist.  
Options While Selecting a Song  
The following options are available for playing songs,  
albums, or playlist, finding more information about artists,  
finding more music, and deleting songs:  
• Delete: Delete the song.  
• Search: Search Amazon MP3, Internet, Music Player, Play  
Music, or YouTube for an artist, album, or song.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
Playing Music  
.
2. Touch an album or song.  
To play a song:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
3. Touch the label area  
under an item.  
Play Music.  
The following options display depending on the item  
view:  
• Play: Plays the selected song, album, or playlist.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
Displaying the Now Playing Screen  
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return  
– or –  
to the Now playing screen from other Music screens:  
While viewing a list of songs, touch  
and touch Play  
next to a song  
.
Touch the name of the current song in the Now Playing  
bar.  
– or –  
– or –  
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or  
Touch the Music notification icon  
Bar, and in the Status Details panel, touch the song  
title.  
in the System  
genres, the label area  
Play  
under an item and touch  
.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you  
touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts  
to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until  
you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a  
repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you  
stop it, even when you switch applications.  
You can also pause and resume playback and skip to  
the next or previous song in the Status Details panel.  
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the  
Music application, the Now Playing bar displays at the  
bottom of the screen. You can use this to control  
playback or touch  
Menu  
Hide now playing bar.  
Music  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Music version: The Google Play Music app version is  
displayed.  
Options While Playing a Song  
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays.  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
• Help: View online help from Google.  
7. The Now playing screen contains several buttons that  
you can touch to control the playback of songs,  
albums, and playlists:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
Touch Thumbs up or Thumbs down to add the  
song to a Thumbs up or Thumbs down playlist.  
The Now playing screen displays.  
Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch  
and hold to scan backward through the current  
song.  
3. Touch the SONG title to add the song to a playlist.  
4. Touch the ARTIST name to view information about the  
artist associated with this song.  
Touch to pause playback.  
Touch to resume playback  
5. Touch ALBUM to list and play the songs on the album.  
6. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Settings: Displays the Music settings screen.  
Google Play account: Choose a Google account to use to  
connect to Google PlayTM Music and then set the Music settings  
as indicated on the screen.  
Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and  
hold to scan forward through the current song.  
Open source licenses: Displays the open source licenses for  
Google Play Music.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Songs To a Playlist  
To add a song to a new or existing playlist while the song is  
playing:  
Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all  
songs, or disable repeat mode.  
When Shuffle mode is enabled, songs play in  
randomorder.Whendisabled,songsplayinthe  
order they appear in List view.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Touch an album or song list and play a song.  
3. Touch SONG  
Apps  
.
.
Creating a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Touch the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch  
The New playlist pop-up displays.  
4. If the Add to new playlist pop-up displays, touch the  
NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.  
– or –  
Apps  
.
If the Add to playlist pop-up displays, touch the playlist  
to which you want to add the song or touch New  
playlist to create a new playlist.  
.
4. Touch the NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.  
5. Touch OK  
.
5. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
The playlist is saved with the song added to it.  
Music  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing, Renaming, or Deleting a Playlist  
To play, rename, or delete a playlist:  
Making Online Music Available Offline  
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online  
library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal  
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no  
Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online  
music available offline.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch next to a playlist title.  
Apps  
.
Touch Play to play the songs in the playlist.  
Touch Rename and use the keyboard to enter a new name for  
the playlist.  
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to  
Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the playlist. Only the  
playlist is deleted. To delete individual songs, see “Options  
To make your online music available offline on your device:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
Shopping for Music at the Play Store  
2. Change your library view to Albums, Artists, or  
To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy  
music  
:
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Make available offline and touch  
Play Music  
.
the album or playlist you want to make available  
offline.  
2. Touch  
Play Store in the Application Bar.  
The Google Play Store music section displays.  
3. Touch Menu Help Music to view information  
about finding and buying music.  
A green pin  
offline.  
indicates that the item is already available  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Gray pins appear next to the items you can make available  
offline.  
Viewing Your Music Library  
The Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy  
from your computer.  
A bar at the bottom of the screen shows how much space is  
available on your device for music and other files.  
Dim green pins indicate songs or albums that you copied  
directly from a computer to your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
The Music Player application searches your device’s  
internal storage for music and playlists. This can take  
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on  
the amount of new music added since you last opened  
the application. It then displays your music in several  
ways.  
4. Touch the gray pin next to each item you want to make  
available offline.  
– or –  
Touch a green pin to stop making it available offline.  
You can switch to other views of your library to make  
other kinds of items available offline as well.  
2. Touch Songs Playlists, Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders,  
,
Composers, or Years to change the way you view the  
contents of your library.  
5. Touch Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.  
The Music application starts downloading the items to  
your device.  
3. Touch the Music application icon  
at the top-left of  
the Application bar to return to the previous Music  
screen.  
Music  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Menu Rename playlist  
Managing Your Music  
Searching for Music  
.
3. Touch the name field to enter a new name for the  
playlist.  
To find music in your library:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Adding Songs to Playlists  
2. Touch  
Search  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
3. Type the name of an artist, album, or song.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
Music Player  
.
2. Touch  
– or –  
and touch a playlist.  
4. Touch a matching song to play it. Touch a matching  
album, or artist to view a list of its songs.  
Creating a Playlist  
Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Add music  
All songs are displayed.  
3. Touch next to each song you want to add or next to  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
Playlists.  
2. Touch  
New playlist.  
Add all to add all songs to the playlist.  
The songs appear under the playlist to the right of the  
songs list.  
3. Touch the name field to enter a name for the playlist.  
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Renaming a Playlist  
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing Songs from Playlists  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Playing a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
Music Player  
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch Favorites Most played, or Recently added, or  
.
2. Touch  
and touch a playlist.  
All songs are displayed to the left of the playlist and the  
songs in the playlist are displayed on the right, under  
the playlist name.  
,
touch a playlist title that you created.  
4. Touch a song to start playing the playlist at that song.  
Deleting a Playlist  
3. Touch  
to remove a song from the playlist.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch Delete in the Application bar.  
Apps  
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
.
Changing the Order of a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch Reorder to change the order of the songs.  
Touch the grid on an entry and drag the entry to a  
.
4. Touch the box next to a playlist title. A check mark  
indicates the playlist is to be deleted.  
5. Touch Remove and then touch OK to delete the selected  
playlist.  
new position in the list.  
4. Touch Done to change the order and save the playlist.  
Music  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
Music auto off: Set the option Off or set your music to turn off  
automatically after 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and  
30 minutes, or 2 hours.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
Music menu  
Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that  
2. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
appear on the main music screen. A check mark  
an option means that it is enabled.  
next to  
• Delete: Touch the box for any song or album you want to delete  
or touch the box for Select all to select every song or album. A  
check mark  
indicates the song or album is to be deleted.  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
Touch Delete to delete the selected items.  
• Share via: Share your music by using AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,  
Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail. Select the songs you want to share  
speakers, through a wired headset or through a wireless  
Bluetooth stereo headset.  
and touch Share  
.
• Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and touch Set to use the  
song as an alarm tone.  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the device  
to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on  
the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key  
to adjust playback volume.  
• Settings: The following settings display:  
Advanced  
Sound settings: Choose SoundAlive and Play speed  
settings.  
Lyrics: Display the lyrics of the song, if available.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. In the Status Details, touch the song title to display the  
Music Player. You can also pause and resume playback  
and skip to the next or previous song in the panel. For  
Playing Music  
To play a song:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player.  
Music Player  
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
– or –  
Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from  
your computer.  
While viewing a list of albums or genres, touch the  
album thumbnail and then touch a song in the list of  
songs on the album.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
2. Touch a song or playlist to begin playback.  
The music player displays below (portrait mode) or to  
the right (landscape mode) of the music listing.  
The song you touch starts to play. The tracks in the  
current list play in order until you reach the end of the  
list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise,  
playback stops only if you stop it, even when you  
switch applications.  
3. Touch the music player to enlarge it and touch the  
screen to display the sound and playlist controls.  
4. During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:  
Accessing the Music Player  
If you navigate away from the Music Player application and  
music is playing, you can change songs or easily return to  
the Music Player:  
• Favorite: Touch the star  
to mark the current song as a  
favorite.  
• Volume: Touch to toggle Vibration or Silent mode and Sound  
mode, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can  
also press the Volume Key on the side of the device to adjust  
playback volume.  
1. Touch the Music notification icon  
in the System  
Bar.  
Music  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Select Device: Use AllShare to stream music to another  
Volume  
List Mode  
Info  
Artist / Album  
Select  
Device  
SoundAlive  
Favorite  
Song Title  
• Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When  
disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view.  
• Progress Bar: Touch and drag the end of the progress bar to  
scan forward or backward through the current song.  
• Playback Controls: These buttons control the playback of  
songs:  
Touch  
to advance to the next song. Touch and hold  
to  
scan forward through the current song.  
Touch  
Touch  
to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold  
to scan backward through the current song.  
Shuffle Progress  
Bar  
Repeat  
Playback  
Controls  
Time  
Indicators  
to pause playback. Touch  
to resume playback.  
• Time Indicators: The time indicators show, in minutes and  
seconds, how much of the song has played (left) and the length  
of the song (right).  
• SoundAlive: Touch to view and set SoundAlive options.  
• Info: Touch to view information about the current song.  
• List Mode: Touch to switch to the list of songs.  
• Repeat: Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or  
disable repeat mode.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
albums, and new releases. Music Hub allows you to search  
for tracks, albums, and artists. Enjoy music samples before  
you download them directly to your Wi-Fi Galaxy Tab.  
Options While Playing a Song  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Note: You must sign up for an account before accessing some  
Music Player, touch a song or an album, and  
of the Music Hub options.  
then a song.  
2. Touch the music player to enlarge it.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Music Hub.  
– or –  
3. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music  
playlist.  
Hub  
.
• Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth  
device.  
2. Read the Disclaimer and touch Confirm to continue or  
Back to exit.  
• Share via: Share the current song by using Wi-Fi Direct,  
Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail.  
The Music Hub Home screen displays.  
3. Touch one of the following options:  
• Set as alarm tone: Use the current song as an alarm tone.  
• Settings: Displays Music Player settings. For more information,  
• Featured: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top  
albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more.  
Touch an item to display more information and prices.  
• Genres: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such  
as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues.  
Music Hub  
Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music  
manager and lets you access, buy, and download millions of  
music tracks. Access top albums, top tracks, featured  
• Playlists: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of  
songs and albums. Touch New to create a new playlist.  
Music  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• My page: Displays the following options:  
Making a Purchase  
You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks.  
Basket: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Touch  
Buy to start the purchase process. Touch  
Delete all to clear your basket or touch  
songs from your basket.  
Menu  
You can also build your own album from various tracks.  
Remove to delete  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Music Hub.  
2. Touch an album or a track.  
Purchase List: Displays a list of your purchases.  
Payment information: Allows you to set up your payment  
method. Touch Add card to enter your payment information.  
Help: Display help information for Music Hub.  
3. Touch  
next to an album to add the album to your  
basket or next to each track that you want to add to  
your basket.  
4. Touch  
next to an album to add the album to your  
album or next to each track that you want to add to  
your album. Touch New to create a new album.  
Note: You have to be signed in to use some options. To sign in,  
touch Sign in and use the keypad to enter your Email  
address and Music Hub Password. Touch Sign in. Touch  
Create account to set up a new account.  
4. Touch  
Search and use the keypad to enter a key  
word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists.  
Touch  
on the keypad to search Music Hub. Touch  
the Tracks  
,
Artists, and Albums tabs to view the results.  
Touch an item to play a sample, add an item to your  
basket, or add an item to your album.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8: Photos and Video  
This section explains how to use your device’s built-in  
camera and camcorder, the Video Player app to view and  
manage videos, and the Gallery app to view, capture, and  
manage photos and videos. It also contains an overview of  
the Photo Editor, Media Hub, and Movie Studio apps.  
GPS  
Active  
Storage  
Indicator  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Mode  
Camera  
Use your device’s built-in camera and camcorder to take  
photos and record videos.  
Camera  
From a Home screen, touch  
The Camera screen displays.  
Apps  
Camera  
.
.
Image  
Viewer  
Taking Photos  
To take a photo:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
Camera  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
2. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your photo  
permission.  
by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings,  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
3. To take the photo, touch the Camera button.  
4. Touch  
Back to leave the Camera and display the  
previous screen.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
       
Configuring Camera Settings  
To configure Camera settings:  
Camera Settings  
Before you start taking photos, use the camera settings to  
configure the camera for best results. Camera settings are  
represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts  
While in Camera mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
touch  
Settings to configure the following camera  
settings:  
The first five icons are actually shortcuts to camera settings.  
These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your  
preference.  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
Flash  
Timer, and  
shortcuts.  
To customize these shortcuts:  
,
Self-portrait  
,
Shooting mode,  
• Self-portrait: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens  
and take a photo of yourself.  
Exposure value are default settings  
• Flash: Choose a flash mode from Off, On, or Auto flash. Off is  
the default.  
1. Touch  
Settings  
Edit shortcuts.  
Warning! If the battery is low, the flash is not available. For  
– or –  
Touch and hold any of the shortcut icons to edit them.  
2. Touch and hold a setting, then drag and drop it on one  
of the five settings shortcuts to the left. The replaced  
setting shortcut displays in the edit list.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode, from:  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Single shot: Take a single photo.  
• Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters the light  
source: Center-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.  
Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to automatically focus on  
the subject’s face and take the photo.  
• Outdoor visibility: When taking outdoor shots in bright  
settings, enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to  
make it easier to see what you are shooting.  
Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo, then use  
the on-screen guideline to move the viewfinder and take the  
next 7 shots automatically.  
Action shot: Detects action and creates a panorama of the  
moving object.  
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the  
luminance of the actual photograph taken.  
• Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from None,  
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Sunset, Dawn, Text, or  
Candlelight.  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in photo  
composition.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
• GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with your GPS  
location.  
displays on the screen when this option is active.  
• Focus mode: Set the focus mode to Auto focus or Macro.  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a photo.  
Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
photo when posting your photos on the internet.  
• Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: None, Negative,  
Black and white, or Sepia.  
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults.  
• Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options are: 3.2M  
(2048x1536) or 0.8M (1024x768).  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
7. To delete the photo being displayed, touch  
Delete  
Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer  
After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share,  
and then touch Delete to delete the photo or Cancel to  
exit.  
delete, or edit photos.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the photo.  
8. Touch  
available pictures and videos.  
9. Touch Menu to select Set picture as to assign the  
Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
photo as a Contact photo, Home and lock screens,  
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.  
3. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
4. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo. The current photo is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the photo it represents.  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as  
5. Touch  
Select device to use AllShare to stream  
photos to another device. For more information, refer to  
10. Press  
photos.  
Back to return to the Camera to take more  
6. Touch  
Share via to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,  
Picasa, Photo editor, Google+, Bluetooth, Social Hub,  
Email, or Gmail to share the photo.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camcorder  
Use your device’s built-in Camcorder to record high-  
Recording Videos  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera  
.
definition video in 720p resolution.  
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the  
Camcorder  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera  
.
setting.  
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the  
Camcorder  
3. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot  
setting.  
by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings,  
The Camcorder screen displays.  
4. To start recording, touch  
Record.  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Current or  
Elapsed Time  
Storage  
Indicator  
During recording, the Record button flashes.  
5. Touch  
6. Touch  
Record to stop recording.  
Mode  
Back to leave the Camcorder and display  
the previous screen.  
Record  
Important! Do not take videos of people without their  
permission.  
Do not take videos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take videos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
Image  
Viewer  
Settings  
Available Storage  
File Size  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
 
• Self-recording: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera  
lens and record a video of yourself.  
Camcorder Settings  
Before you start taking videos, use the camcorder settings to  
configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder settings  
are represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
Editing Camcorder Settings Shortcuts  
As with the camera, the first five icons are actually shortcuts  
to camcorder settings. These five shortcuts can be  
customized to fit your preference.  
• Flash: Touch Off or On to disable or enable the flash.  
• Recording mode: Set a recording mode. Options are: Normal  
and Limit for email, which limits the size of the video to 50  
megabytes.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
Flash  
Timer, and  
shortcuts.  
,
Self-recording  
,
Recording mode,  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a  
video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
• Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: None, Negative,  
Black and white, or Sepia.  
Exposure value are default settings  
• Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options are: 1280x720 or  
640x480.  
Configuring Camcorder Settings  
To configure Camcorder settings:  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
• Outdoor visibility: When recording outdoors in bright settings,  
enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to make it  
easier to see what you are recording.  
While in Camcorder mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
touch Settings to configure the following  
Camcorder settings:  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Touch  
Share via to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,  
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the  
Google+, Bluetooth, Social Hub, YouTube, Email, or  
Gmail to share the video.  
luminance of the actual video taken.  
6. To delete the video being displayed, touch  
and then touch Delete to delete the video or Cancel to  
exit.  
Delete  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in video  
composition.  
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults.  
7. Touch  
Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer  
After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share,  
available pictures and videos.  
or delete your video.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the video.  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
8. To play a video, touch  
pause the video and touch  
playing the video.  
Play. Touch  
Pause to  
3. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous video. The current video is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the video it represents.  
Resume to resume  
9. Touch  
SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or 5.1 ch.  
4. Touch  
Select device to use AllShare to stream  
videos to another device. For more information, refer to  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
10. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
4. While viewing the list, touch  
Menu for options:  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
• List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.  
• Share via: Share the video with Wi-Fi Direct, Google+,  
Bluetooth, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.  
• Delete: Touch videos to select them for deletion or touch  
Select all to delete all videos. Touch Delete to deleted the  
selected videos.  
Touch  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
11. Press Back to return to the Camcorder.  
Rewind to restart the video or  
• Auto play next: Touch to enable or disable automatic playing of  
videos in the order they appear.  
Video Player  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen  
provides playback of videos. Use Video player to view and  
manage videos stored on your tablet.  
5. Touch a video to play it. While playing a video, touch  
the screen to display or hide on-screen playback  
controls.  
6. Touch the icon in the upper left corner of the display  
screen while the video is playing to change the Display  
Mode from original size to full screen in ratio or full  
screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video player  
2. Touch the Thumbnails  
3. Touch  
search term. The current folder is searched and results  
are displayed. Touch to remove the search field.  
Apps  
.
,
List, or Folders tab.  
Search and use the keyboard to enter a  
• Original Size  
(
): Changes the display mode to the original  
size.  
X
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Full-Screen in Ratio View  
to the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much  
as possible without becoming distorted.  
(
): Changes the display mode  
• Via Bluetooth: Turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth services.  
• Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a  
thumbnail and time are displayed for each bookmark. Touch  
to remove a bookmark.  
• Full-Screen View  
(
): Changes the display mode to full  
screen. That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause  
some minor distortion.  
• Settings: Touch this option to view the following:  
Play speed: Touch and drag the slider to decrease or increase  
play speed.  
7. Touch  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or 5.1 ch.  
8. Touch Select device to use AllShare to stream  
SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
Subtitles: View subtitles for the video, if available.  
Auto play next: Enable or disable auto play of the next video.  
Color tone: Set the color tone to Normal, Warm, or Cold.  
Outdoor visibility: Turn outdoor visibility On or Off.  
videos to another device. For more information, refer to  
9. While the video is playing, touch  
Bookmark to  
• Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,  
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.  
mark your favorite areas of the video. A yellow mark  
displays on the progress bar.  
10. During playback, press  
Menu for options:  
• Share via: Send the video by Wi-Fi Direct, Google+, Bluetooth,  
Social Hub, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.  
Trim: Trim the original video or trim the video and create a new  
video.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
• Make available offline: In addition to playing the videos that  
you add to your online library, you can play videos stored on  
your device’s internal storage. Then you can view videos when  
you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some of your  
online videos available offline.  
Gallery  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA PLS TFT LCD screen  
provides a high-resolution display of photos and videos.  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
Selecting Photos and Videos to View  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Note: Making videos available offline is very similar to making  
All albums display.  
2. Touch Albums to display other ways to group your  
photos and videos. Options are:  
Viewing Groups of Photos and Videos  
• Albums: Based on the folder in which they are stored.  
• Locations: Based on where taken.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it.  
• Time: Based on the time taken.  
Thumbnails for each photo and video in the group  
display.  
Tags: Based on tags applied.  
3. Touch  
Camera to launch the Camera app.  
3. Touch  
available pictures and videos.  
4. Touch Menu for these options:  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of the  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Select album / Select group: Touch one or more albums or  
groups that you want to share, stream to another device, or  
delete.  
• Select item: Touch one or more items that you want to share,  
stream to another device, or delete.  
• Group by: Further group this group by Location, Time, or Tags,  
depending on the way you chose the group.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8. Touch  
Delete to delete the photo or video being  
Viewing Photos and Videos  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
displayed. Touch Confirm to delete the photo or video or  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Cancel to exit.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
touch a photo or video thumbnail.  
9. Touch  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of photos  
and video thumbnails in the category. Touch the screen  
to stop the slideshow and view the photo or video  
being displayed.  
3. Touch the screen to show or hide Gallery options.  
4. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
10. Touch  
photos:  
Menu to display the following options for  
5. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the  
Play button.) The current photo or video is  
outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen.  
Touch a thumbnail to view the photo or video it  
represents.  
• Copy to clipboard: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.  
• Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop  
box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop  
area, then touch Done. Touch to stop without cropping the  
photo.  
X
• Rotateleft: Allows you to rotate the photo counterclockwise 90  
degrees.  
6. Touch  
Select device to use AllShare to stream  
photos or videos to another device. For more  
• Rotate right: Allows you to rotate the photo clockwise 90  
degrees.  
7. Touch  
Share to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct, Picasa  
(photos), Photo editor (photos), Google+, Bluetooth,  
Social Hub, YouTube (videos), Email, or Gmail to share  
the photo or video.  
• Set picture as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Lock  
Screen, or Wallpaper.  
• Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
   
• Edit: Use Photo editor or Photo studio to edit photos.  
• Motion: Display the Motion settings. For more information,  
There is only two options for videos that are not  
playing:  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the  
photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in  
the Camera settings. Touch this option to open the Map app  
and display the Location where the photo was taken. For more  
• Details: Provides details about the video such as Title, Time,  
Duration, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the  
pop-up.  
For menu options while a video is playing and other  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as  
photo when posting your photos on the internet.  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time,  
Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close  
to close the pop-up.  
11. Press  
Back to return to the category screen.  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting a Picture As  
You can use the photos you take as a contact’s photo or as  
Tip: To change wallpaper, see “Wallpapers” on page 34.  
wallpaper for the Home or Lock screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Playing Videos  
Apps  
Gallery.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
touch a photo to select it.  
touch a video thumbnail to play the video.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Set picture as.  
Note: Videos are marked with a  
Play button.  
4. Touch Contact photo and then touch a contact entry.  
– or –  
3. Touch  
Pause to pause the video.  
Touch Home and lock screens  
or Lock screen wallpaper  
The Crop picture screen displays.  
,
Home screen wallpaper,  
4. Touch  
Resume to resume playing the video.  
.
5. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
5. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of  
the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done  
to save the cropped photo as the contact’s icon or  
wallpaper. Touch Cancel to stop without cropping the  
photo.  
Touch  
Rewind to restart the video or  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
   
Sharing Photos and Videos  
Share photos and videos with your friends.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Photo Editor  
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions  
for photos that you take on your device. Along with basic  
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color, it also  
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the photo.  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to display  
thumbnails.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Photo editor  
Apps  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Select item.  
.
4. Touch one or more photos and videos to highlight them  
2. Touch Select picture to edit a photo in your Gallery.  
for sharing.  
– or –  
5. Touch  
Share.  
Touch Take picture to take a photo with the camera.  
6. Touch Deselect all in the Selected drop-down to  
3. Touch the photo to load it into the Photo editor.  
4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your  
photo:  
unhighlight photos and videos.  
7. Touch AllShare  
Photo Editor (photos only), Google+  
Social Hub YouTube (videos only), Email, or Gmail then  
follow the prompts.  
,
Wi-Fi Direct  
,
Picasa (photos only),  
,
Bluetooth  
,
Selection: Touch the selection icon and then  
,
touch Magnetic  
Squaretosethowtomarkanareaforcropping,  
rotating, and so on. Touch to select a  
single area, to add to a selected area, or  
to remove part of a selected area.  
,
Lasso, Brush, Round, or  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SelectionSize:SetthesizeoftheGrabselection  
area. Drag the slider from small to large.  
Effects:Addvariouseffectstoyourphoto,such  
as Blur Motion Distortion Filter, or Frames  
,
,
,
.
Inverse:Selecttheentirepictureexceptforthe  
selected area.  
Tools: Copy and Paste to another image or to  
the original image. You can use the Spot  
healing option.  
Undo: Remove the last change.  
5. When all updates to the photo have been made, touch  
Save. Use the keyboard to name the edited photo  
and touch OK to save it.  
Redo: Restore a removed change.  
Rotate: Rotate a photo to the left or to the right  
or create a mirror image of the photo.  
6. While editing a photo, touch  
Menu to display the  
following options:  
• Select picture: Open a new photo for editing.  
Resize: Touch and then drag the corners of the  
photo to resize it.  
Take picture: Open the Camera and take a new photo.  
• Share via: Send photos to another device or another person.  
Options are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+,  
Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Crop:Touchtocrop(cut-out)anareaofaphoto.  
Color: Set the Auto adjustment  
Saturation Contrast Brightness, and Hue of a  
photo. You can also make it Grey-scale or add  
Temperature effect.  
,
Exposure,  
,
,
• Set as: Use this photo as a Contact photo, a Home and lock  
screens  
,
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper  
a
image.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining on the go has never been easier. You  
can rent or purchase your favorite content and conveniently  
watch anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality  
Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway  
to mobile video like you have never experienced it before.  
3. To rent or buy media, you must have a Samsung  
account. Touch  
Menu  
My Profile to sign in to  
your Samsung account or to create an account. Follow  
the prompts to complete log-in.  
4. Browse content using these options:  
• What’s new: Recently-added titles for rent or purchase.  
• Movies: Movies you can rent or purchase.  
Tip: A shortcut to Media Hub appears on the main Home  
• TV Shows: TV shows you can rent or purchase.  
• My Media: Content you have previously purchased or rented.  
5. When you find media you want to view, use these  
options:  
screen by default.  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and  
depends on service availability.  
• View trailer: View a short clip from the movie or show.  
• Buy: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device.  
Follow the prompts to enter payment details.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Media Hub.  
– or –  
• Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow  
the prompts to enter payment details.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Media Hub.  
6. For additional information about Media Hub, touch  
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA), touch  
I agree to the Terms and Conditions, and then touch  
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
Menu  
Help.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as  
a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
Stopping, pausing, or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile device, including All Share.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
Movie Studio  
Use Movie Studio to edit the videos you take with the  
camcorder or copy onto your tablet into movies. You can cut  
and order scenes, add a sound track, and so on.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Movie Studio  
Adding a New Movie Project  
To use Movie Studio to work with videos, add a new project:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Apps  
.
Movie Studio  
.
3. To add video clips or photos to your project, touch  
ADD and then touch one of the following:  
• Record a video: Use the Camcorder to record a new video  
segment.  
2. Touch  
New project  
.
The Project name pop-up displays.  
3. Use the keypad to enter a project name and touch OK  
Updating a Movie Project  
.
Take a photo: Use the Camera to take a new photo.  
• Import video clip: Add an existing video.  
There are several ways to add videos, photos, and sound to  
your movie project.  
• Import image: Add an existing photo.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Movie Studio  
Apps  
• Import music: Add music to your project. Alternately, touch  
at the bottom of the screen to add music to your project.  
.
2. Add a new project or touch an existing movie project.  
The Movie Project screen displays.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
7. Touch a segment to add effects, add a title, and select  
• Change aspect ratio: Choose an aspect ratio. The aspect ratio  
of each segment in the project is listed.  
a transition for the beginning or end of the segment.  
8. Touch a segment and then touch  
Menu to display  
• Change project name: Use the keypad to change the name of  
the current movie project.  
the following options:  
• Change rendering mode: Choices are Black borders, Stretch  
to fit, and Crop.  
• Export movie: Set the movie size and quality, and save the  
updated movie.  
• Remove: Touch Yes to delete the selected segment.  
9. Touch a segment  
• Delete project: Delete the current movie project.  
5. To control playback of your project, touch one of the  
following  
Deleting a Movie Project  
To delete an existing movie project:  
Play to play the video.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Movie Studio  
Apps  
Pause to pause the video.  
.
Previous segment to go back one segment.  
Next segment to go forward one segment.  
Rewind to back up to the start of the project segments.  
2. Sweep across the screen to locate the project you want  
to delete.  
3. Touch and hold the project thumbnail.  
6. Touch and drag the  
Workspace control to expand  
4. Touch Delete project and then touch Yes  
.
or contract the workspace.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
Section 9: Connections  
Your device includes features to connect to the internet and  
to other devices by using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or a USB cable.  
Finding Wi-Fi Networks  
You can have your device automatically notify you of  
Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides  
access to local area networks. Use your device’s Wi-Fi  
feature to:  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn  
Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for  
available, in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
Access the internet for browsing or to send and receive email.  
Access your corporate network.  
Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling.  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless  
Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with  
most hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login  
credentials). Your device supports the 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi  
protocol.  
The Status Details displays.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
The Status Details displays.  
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings  
For more information about configuring your device’s Wi-Fi  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available  
Wi-Fi connections, then displays them on screen.  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
The Status Details displays.  
• Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex  
key.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically  
4. Touch Save to save the settings.  
scans for available Wireless Access Points.  
3. When the scan is complete, touch a Wi-Fi network to  
connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device  
automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is  
secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... Wi-Fi Direct  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Adding a Wi  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
3. Touch Add network, then enter network information:  
• Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi Fi Wireless Access  
Point (WAP).  
• Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP.  
-
Fi Network Manually  
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Wi-Fi Direct  
Apps  
on.  
.
If you are currently connected to a Wi-Fi network, a  
prompt displays Start Wi-Fi Direct operation. This will  
turn off Wi-Fi client/hotspot operation  
.
-
3. Touch OK to continue.  
Your device will begin to search for other devices  
enabled with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
         
4. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
5. Enable Wi-Fi Direct (similar to Steps 1 and 2) on the  
device to which you want to connect.  
2. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
The Wi-Fi Direct settings screen displays, Wi-Fi Direct  
is turned on, and your device scans for other devices.  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
touch on it.  
3. Touch a connected device name. For example,  
Android_XXXX.  
An Invitation to connect displays on the device to which  
you want to connect.  
4. The other device displays a pop-up that indicates it is  
receiving the file.  
7. On that device, touch Accept  
.
The file is transferred and can be found in My files in  
the ShareViaWifi folder.  
You have 2 minutes to touch Accept on the device to  
which you want to connect for the connection to be  
made.  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the bottom of your screen.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications  
technology for exchanging information over a distance of  
about 30 feet.  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share videos, photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
You do not need to line up the devices to send information  
with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange  
information between them, even if they are in different  
rooms.  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My files folder, then touch the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
Configuring Bluetooth Settings  
Configure your device’s Bluetooth settings. For more  
.
2. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
To turn Bluetooth on or off:  
3. Enable the target device’s discoverable or visible  
mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Bluetooth tab,  
Apps  
4. Touch the Bluetooth tab and then touch Scan for  
devices. Touch Stop at any time to stop scanning.  
5. From the list of found devices, touch the target device,  
then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:  
.
touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Bluetooth on or  
off.  
If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target  
device and touch OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the  
target device.  
Note: When Bluetooth is on, the Bluetooth icon  
displays in  
the Status Bar.  
If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device  
attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the  
prompts on your device and the target device to complete the  
pairing.  
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device  
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it, to exchange  
information between your device and the target device.  
Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device recognize  
each other and exchange information without having to  
enter a passcode or PIN.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
       
Sharing Data with a Bluetooth Device  
To send data to a Bluetooth device:  
Receiving Data from a Bluetooth Device  
To receive data from a Bluetooth device:  
1. Select a file or item from an appropriate application.  
2. Select an option for sharing data with the Bluetooth  
feature.  
Note: To select the length of time that your device will be  
visible, select  
Menu  
Visible time-out.  
Note: The method for selecting an option may vary by data  
type.  
2. Pair with the Bluetooth device from which you want to  
3. Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device. For more  
A Bluetooth authorization request pop-up displays  
when a Bluetooth device sends data to your device.  
3. Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive  
data.  
A File received message displays.  
Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive  
a contact, it is saved to your contacts automatically.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling an App  
Managing Downloads  
Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can  
download additional apps from Google Play. If you decide to,  
you can uninstall apps you downloaded from Google Play and  
other sources.  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail,  
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or  
delete what you have downloaded.  
There are several ways to uninstall an app:  
To manage the demands on their networks or to help you  
avoid unexpected charges, some mobile networks place  
restrictions on the size of the files you can download. When  
you are connected to such networks, and you try to  
download an oversized-file, you are asked or required to  
delay downloading the file until the next time you are  
connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the download  
resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also be used  
to view and manage these queued files.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Applications  
2. Touch the Downloaded tab.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Touch the app you want to uninstall.  
4. Touch the Uninstall button.  
A pop-up displays the message This application will be  
uninstalled  
.
Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in  
your tablet’s internal storage. You can view and copy files  
from this directory when connected to a computer with a  
USB cable.  
5. Touch OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app.  
You can also use Google Play to uninstall apps you  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
     
To uninstall an app from the Apps screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications  
The Downloaded applications screen displays.  
To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung  
applications, browse featured applications and download  
.
.
.
Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh  
computers.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Uninstall.  
A
appears on Apps that can be uninstalled.  
Connecting With Samsung Kies  
1. Install Samsung Kies software on your PC.  
4. Touch an app’s icon and then touch OK to uninstall and  
remove the app from your tablet.  
Warning! Close any running applications before connecting  
Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with  
Android. You can only uninstall the apps you have  
downloaded.  
your device to a PC.  
2. Run Samsung Kies.  
3. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Kies Via Wi-Fi  
Samsung Kies is a software that enables you to update your  
device firmware, synchronize files, and transfer data to and  
from your device directly by connecting to the PC.  
Settings  
.
4. Touch More ...  
Kies via Wi-Fi.  
Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
5. Follow the prompts from Kies to update your device  
firmware.  
Note: Some features will be supported through the System  
Updates feature in the future. For more information,  
6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Synchronizing with Windows Media  
Player  
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.  
1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory.  
1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
2. Click the option to Open device to view files.  
2. Click the option to Sync digital media files to this device  
to synchronize music files.  
You should see a Tablet folder.  
3. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync  
list and begin synchronizing.  
3. Copy files to or from the PC from or to the device  
(Tablet folder).  
4. When finished, exit Windows Media Player and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
4. When finished, close the PC folder and disconnect the  
USB cable.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
           
Section 10: Applications and Widgets  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available on the Apps screen, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
Various widgets are also described.  
GPS Applications  
GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-  
enabled, turn-by-turn navigation and to access local  
searches based on a variety of category parameters.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Update Available  
When you open an application that is preloaded on your  
device, an Update Available message may be displayed if  
there is a new version of the app available.  
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of  
Interest content is available for three continents, including  
North America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe,  
and China, where wireless coverage is available.  
Touch Upgrade to update the app or touch Not Now to  
open the app without updating.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Alarm  
Important! If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna  
while using GPS services, it may impede the GPS  
signal resulting in the GPS services not working in  
an optimal manner. Refer to the following diagram  
to locate the approximate location of the internal  
GPS antenna.  
Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times.  
Adding and Configuring Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Create alarm or touch an alarm that is  
already set.  
Apps  
Alarm  
.
3. Touch fields to configure the alarm:  
Location of Internal  
Antenna  
• Time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Touch  
+
or  
-
to change  
the hour and minute, and touch AM or PM  
.
• Label: Touch the field and use the keyboard to enter a name  
for the alarm.  
• Repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days are  
blue.  
• Ringtone: Choose a tone for alarms.  
• Vibrate: Enable or disable vibration for the alarm.  
• Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm.  
4. Touch Done to save the alarm.  
The main Alarm screen displays showing the new or  
updated alarm.  
(Back view  
of device)  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
   
Activating Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds:  
Apps  
Alarm.  
2. Touch  
Turn alarm on to activate the alarm. A gray  
Touch and slide  
to the left. Snooze must first be  
alarm means the alarm is deactivated.  
set in the alarm settings.  
3. Touch an alarm to change any of its settings and then  
Alarm Settings  
To configure general alarm settings:  
touch Done to save the updates.  
Deactivating and Deleting Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Alarm.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Alarm.  
2. Touch  
Settings.  
2. Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the  
following options:  
The following options display:  
• Alarm in silent mode: Enable alarms to play even if the tablet  
is in Silent mode.  
• Delete alarm: Delete the alarm.  
• Deactivate alarm: Turn off the alarm.  
– or –  
• Alarm volume: Touch and drag the slider to set Alarm volume.  
• Snooze duration: Set the snooze delay time to 3, 5, 10, 15, or  
30 minutes.  
Touch  
to delete, and then touch Done  
Turning Off an Alarm  
When the alarm sounds, to turn off the alarm:  
Delete, touch the existing alarms you want  
.
• Snooze repeat: Indicate how many times to repeat the snooze  
alarm: 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Side button settings: Set what action the side buttons should  
take during an alarm: None, Snooze, or Dismiss.  
Touch and drag  
to the right.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Set default ringtone: Choose a ringtone to play as a default, if  
3. Touch  
Settings to configure these settings:  
the Ringtone is not defined for an alarm. Touch the button next  
• Media server name: Use the keyboard to enter a new media  
to the ringtone you want to set and touch OK  
.
server name, if desired (the default is your device’s default  
name), then touch Save  
• Share media: Allows you to restrict what is shared from your  
device. Touch the items you want to share and touch OK  
.
AllShare  
AllShare allows your tablet to stream photos, music, and  
videos from its memory to other Digital Living Network  
Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your tablet can also play  
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices.  
.
• Access point network: Turn on your Wi-Fi service and  
connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.  
• Upload from other devices: Set your device’s treatment of  
files copied from other devices. Choose from Always accept  
Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products  
,
visit  
Always ask, or Never allow, then touch OK  
.
.
4. Touch one of the device entries on the left of the  
AllShare screen. My device lists the Videos, Photos, and  
Music files on your device.  
Configuring AllShare  
Connect to Wi-Fi, configure AllShare settings to identify your  
device as a server, and set treatment of copied files.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
5. Touch a file to play it.  
The Select device pop-up displays. Touch the playback  
device.  
6. Touch and hold a file to view details about the file, such  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
AllShare  
Apps  
as, Title, Date created, File location, and so on.  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
     
2. Touch store to search Amazon MP3 for Bestsellers and  
New Releases or to Browse By Genre.  
– or –  
Amazon Kindle  
Use the Amazon KindleTM application to download books for  
reading, right on your device.  
Touch player to play your music anywhere.  
Note: You must be registered with Amazon to use the Kindle  
Touch Cloud or Device  
.
application.  
Touch Playlists Artists Albums, or Songs.  
,
,
From a Home screen, touch  
Amazon Kindle  
Apps  
Touch a playlist, an artist, an album, or a song.  
Touch store, in the upper right hand corner of the screen, to  
visit the amazon MP3 store. Touch player to return to the  
music player.  
.
Amazon MP3  
The Amazon MP3 app for Android includes both the Amazon  
MP3 store and Amazon Cloud Player. Shop for music and  
play music stored on your tablet. Play or download music  
stored in Amazon Cloud Drive.  
Calculator  
The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to  
solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to  
solve more complex problems.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Amazon MP3  
Apps  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calculator  
Apps  
The Amazon MP3 store and player options display the  
first time you request the Amazon MP3 app.  
.
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the  
+
(add),  
-
(subtract),  
×
(multiply), or  
÷
(divide) key.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Enter the next number.  
2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:  
Year: Display all twelve months of this year. Sweep across the  
years at the bottom of the screen to display another year.  
• Month: Display the current month. Touch a month and year at  
the bottom of the screen to display another month.  
• Week: Display the current week. Touch a week at the bottom of  
the screen to display another week.  
5. To view the result, touch the  
=
(equals) key.  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as many times as required.  
7. Touch to clear the result.  
8. For more advanced problems, rotate your device to  
landscape mode and use the advanced operators sin  
,
ln,  
cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a  
• Day: Display today’s schedule by hour. Touch day at the bottom  
of the screen to display another day.  
pocket calculator.  
9. Touch and hold the Calculator’s display to copy or cut  
the contents of the display.  
• List: Display only event and task names and dates for a  
selected year. Touch a year at the bottom of the screen to  
display another year. Touch a date to hide or show the event or  
task name.  
Copied to clipboard displays. Paste the copied value in  
another app.  
Calendar  
Task: Display your list of tasks. Touch the sort field to change  
how your tasks are sorted. Tasks can be sorted by due date,  
priority, date, week, month, or group.  
Your device includes a powerful Calender to help you  
organize your schedules more conveniently and effectively.  
Learn to create and manage events and tasks, and set  
alarms to remind yourself of important events and tasks.  
3. Swipe left or right across the screen to view other days  
or other weeks. Swipe up or down the screen to view  
other events.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calendar  
Apps  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
     
4. To find an event or task, touch  
Search  
.
• Delete: Delete events for the year, month, week, day, week,  
month, before today, or all events, depending on the Calendar  
view.  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term.  
Possible events display as you type.  
• Sync: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries among all of  
your current accounts, for example, Gmail, Exchange, and so  
on.  
Touch  
Touch an event to send, edit, or delete the event.  
5. Touch Add event / Add task and then touch Done to  
add a new event to your calendar. For more  
on the keyboard to remove it.  
• Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer  
information, refer to “Creating an Event or Task” on  
page 148.  
• Show controls Hide controls: Show or hide a small month  
/
calendar and a list of events in landscape mode.  
7. Touch Today to return to the current date.  
8. Touch Calendars to configure which events to display.  
6. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Zoom in: In the Week and Day views, increase the size of the  
area being viewed.  
Touch Add account  
Add account to add  
• Zoom out: In the Week and Day views, decrease the size of the  
area being viewed.  
additional accounts from which calendar events can be  
synced.  
• Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch  
Set to display that date on your calendar.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating an Event or Task  
To create an event or task:  
Managing Events  
You can delete, send, and edit events on your mobile device:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calendar  
2. Touch an event.  
Apps  
Calendar  
.
.
2. Double-tap the date for which you want to enter an all  
day event or task.  
A pop-up displays event information.  
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
3. Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the event.  
Touch the My calendar field and touch a calendar to which the  
even or task should be added.  
Touch  
Menu  
Share via and then touch Bluetooth,  
Email, or Wi-Fi Direct to share the event.  
Touch Edit to update the event details.  
– or –  
Use the keyboard to enter the event or task name.  
– or –  
Touch the date for which you want to enter an event or  
task.  
Touch  
Options and then touch  
Edit  
Delete,  
Share via, or  
.
Touch  
.
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
Enter the event or task information.  
3. Touch Save  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
 
View settings  
Add Additional Calendar Accounts  
To add additional accounts:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
• First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.  
• Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.  
• Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates  
based on your selected time zone, which is defined by the  
following field.  
Apps  
Add account.  
Calendar  
Calendars  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
The Accounts and sync screen displays.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this  
option to select a time zone to lock event times and dates.  
• Show week number: Show the week number to the left of  
each week in the Month view.  
2. Touch  
Add account to display the Add account  
option.  
• Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.  
Event notification  
3. Touch an account type and enter your account  
information.  
• Set alerts & notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to  
set the Alert, Status bar notification, or Off.  
Calendar Settings  
To set up Calendar preferences:  
• Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.  
• Vibration: Enable or disable vibration mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Calendar  
.
• Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification  
before an event is to occur.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Settings.  
The following options display:  
• Notifications while screen is off: Enable or disable the display  
of notifications on the full screen while the screen is turned off.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sync settings  
Downloads  
• Sync events/tasks: Displays the General sync settings. For  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail,  
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
what you have downloaded.  
(Accounts): Touch an account and then touch the check  
box to enable or disable the calendar sync for that  
account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Downloads  
2. Touch an item to open it.  
Apps  
.
Camera  
3. Touch headings for earlier downloads to view them.  
Take photos and record video with your device’s built in  
Camera.  
4. Touch items you want to send, to check them, and then  
touch  
Share via. Touch an option to share the item.  
Options are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, Photo editor, Picasa, YouTube, Social Hub, or  
Wi-Fi Direct.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera.  
Contacts  
Store contact information for your friends, family and  
5. Touch items you want to delete, to check them, and  
colleagues, to quickly access information or to send a  
then touch  
Delete.  
The items are deleted from your tablet.  
6. Touch Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the  
From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
Downloads pop-up, to switch back and forth.  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
           
3. Touch the screen to display options that can be used  
Dual Clock  
while reading a book.  
Display the time for two different locations.  
There are options on the top, left that let you highlight text,  
draw on the page, erase drawings, and configure the pen and  
highlighting.  
To add the Dual clock widget to a Home screen, see “Adding  
1. From a Home screen, locate the Dual clock widget.  
There are options on the top, right that let you set the font and  
theme, set the speed and pitch of text-to-speech, search the  
book, and bookmark pages in the book.  
The Dual clock widget is actually two widgets. Each  
widget displays the time, a city name, and the  
Daylight Saving Time setting, if it is set.  
4. Touch and hold a word in a book to display the  
following options: Copy Highlight Memo, and Search  
Touch and drag either tab to select more or less  
2. Touch either widget to choose a different city than the  
,
,
.
one currently displayed.  
eBook  
text. Select Memo and use the keyboard to create a  
memo about the selected text.  
This application lets you access and read books on your  
device.  
5. While reading a book or PDF, touch  
Menu for these  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
eBook.  
options:  
The eBook main screen displays.  
Table of contents: Displays a table of contents for the book.  
Touch an entry to display that page in the book.  
• Bookmarks: Displays bookmarked pages. Touch an entry to  
display that page in the book.  
Options While Reading a Book  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
eBook.  
2. Touch the cover of a book or PDF to start reading.  
Once the book displays, sweep across the screen to  
turn the page.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Highlights: Displays pages on which highlights have been  
made.  
3. To find a book by title or author name, touch  
Search, use the keyboard to enter a key word or phrase  
to search for, and touch Go on the keyboard to search.  
• Memos: Displays pages on which memos have been created  
and the memo text.  
4. Touch  
List to view your books in a list mode. Then  
Title Authors, or Categories to view your  
touch Recent  
,
,
• Drawings: Displays pages on which drawings have been  
made.  
books in a different way.  
5. To add more books to your library, touch  
Shop.  
• Information: Displays various information about the book,  
such as author, format, size, and download date.  
A pop-up displays several book sellers and their  
internet webpage addresses. Touch a link to shop for  
more books, touch Add store to add a new webpage, or  
touch Delete to delete one or more of the existing  
webpage entries.  
Note: For Bookmarks, Highlights, Memos, and Drawings,  
touch  
Delete and then touch entries or Select all to  
delete entries.  
6. Touch  
• Edit: Touch  
Done  
Menu for these options:  
6. Touch  
Back to return to the eBook main screen.  
to select books to be deleted and then touch  
Managing Your Books  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
.
Apps  
eBook.  
• Import: Add books from My files.  
2. In the Application bar, on the upper left of the eBook  
main screen, touch All to display all books and PDFs,  
Book to display only books, and PDF to display only  
PDFs.  
• Accounts: To read books, create or sign in to an Adobe  
account, which allows you to open copyright protected books.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Email  
Internet  
Send and receive email using popular email services.  
Your device includes a full HTML browser, to access the  
internet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
Gallery  
Tip: A shortcut to Internet displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Internet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Gmail  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
Internet.  
Latitude  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
Use Google Latitude to locate your friends on a map and  
Google+  
Share updates and see what is going on around you with  
Google+ for mobile.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Latitude.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Google+.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Local  
Media Hub  
Google Local uses your location to help you find nearby  
destinations, such as restaurants, bars, hotels, attractions,  
ATMs and gas stations, or you can enter a location.  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content.  
Tip: A shortcut to Media Hub displays on the main Home  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Local.  
screen by default.  
Maps  
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,  
and other location-based information. For more information,  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Media Hub account and  
depends on service availability.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Media Hub.  
Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on the main Home screen by  
default.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Maps.  
Media Hub.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Maps.  
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some  
features require Standalone or Google location services.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
       
• Print: Select one or all memos, touch Print, and send the  
memos to a Samsung printer.  
Memo  
Create and manage text memos and use Bluetooth to send  
memos to paired Bluetooth devices.  
• Sync memo: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up  
your memos.  
Composing a Memo  
• PIN lock: Set a PIN number to use to lock your memos.  
• Font size: Set the text font size. Options are: Tiny, Small,  
Normal, Large, and Huge.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
New memo, compose the memo, then touch  
Done to save.  
Memo.  
2. Touch  
4. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to  
display the following options:  
Memo List Options  
While viewing the list of Memos:  
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.  
• Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN number to  
remove the lock form the memo. Once you lock a memo, you  
have to use your PIN number to view the memo.  
1. Touch  
List to view your memos in a list mode.  
Touch an entry in the list on the left to view the memo  
on the right of the screen.  
• Share via: Touch Bluetooth Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to  
,
2. To delete one or more memos, touch  
one or all memos, and touch Delete  
3. Touch Menu for the following options:  
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date  
Color  
• Share via: Select one or all memos, touch Share, and then  
touch Bluetooth Email Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to send  
memos to another device or another person.  
Delete, select  
send the memo by the selected method. For more information,  
.
,
Title, or  
.
,
,
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Memo Options  
While viewing a Memo:  
Messenger  
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation.  
Touch  
Memo options for the following options:  
Delete: Delete this Memo.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
Apps  
.
Color: Choose a color for this memo.  
Movie Studio  
Use Movie Studio to edit the videos you take with the  
camcorder or copy onto your tablet into movies. You can cut  
and order scenes, add a sound track, and so on.  
Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN  
numbertoremovethelockformthememo.Once  
you lock a memo, you have to use your PIN  
number to view the memo.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Movie Studio  
Apps  
Print: Send this memo to a Samsung printer.  
.
Share via: Touch Bluetooth Email, Gmail, or  
,
Wi-Fi Direct to send the memo by the selected  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
   
Music Hub  
My Files  
The Music Hub lets you purchase and download songs and  
albums.  
Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files,  
photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the  
file is associated with an application on your device, you can  
launch the file in the application.  
Tip: A shortcut to Music Hub appears on the main Home  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
My Files  
Apps  
screen by default.  
.
2. Touch a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Music Hub.  
file.  
Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
you encounter files.  
Music Hub.  
Music Player  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
3. Touch a file to launch it in the associated application, if  
the file is associated with an application.  
4. While browsing files, use these controls:  
Up: Display a higher directory.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
Search:Usethekeyboardtoenterasearchterm.  
The current folder is searched and results are  
displayed. Touch to remove the search field.  
X
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Navigation  
Display mode: Enable or disable thumbnails for  
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and get walking  
each file.  
Root: Display the root directory.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Navigation  
Apps  
Add Folder: Addanew folder inthe current folder.  
.
Pen Memo  
Create and manage memos that you create by typing text or  
writing with your finger or a stylus. You can even draw and  
save pictures as a memo. You can also share your memos.  
Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file or  
next to the folder to select all files in the folder.  
Then touch send, copy, cut, or delete in the  
Application bar.  
Composing a Pen Memo  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
5. To view a photo file:  
Touch the file.  
Pen memo  
.
2. Touch  
New pen memo  
.
The Gallery app is used to open the photo.  
3. Touch the Enter title field and use the keyboard to enter  
a title for the memo.  
6. To view a video file:  
4. Touch the body of the memo and then touch:  
Type the memo.  
Touch the file.  
The Video player is launched and plays the video.  
Write or draw with your finger or a stylus.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
       
3. To delete one or more memos, touch  
one or all memos, and touch Delete  
4. Touch Menu for the following options:  
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date  
first Drawing first, or Auto tag first  
• Share via: Select one or all memos, touch Share, and then  
touch AllShare Bluetooth Email Gmail Google+  
Photo editor Picasa Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to send  
Delete, select  
Erase writing or drawing.  
.
Set Brush, Color, Pen size, Eraser size, and  
Theme.  
,
Title, Text  
Undo the last writing or drawing  
.
,
.
Redo the last writing or drawing.  
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
memos to another device or another person.  
5. Touch  
Done to save.  
• Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select  
one or all memos, and touch Export  
.
Pen Memo List Options  
While viewing the list of Memos:  
1. To find a memo, touch  
• Print: Select one or all memos, touch Print, and send the  
memos to a Samsung printer.  
Search, use the keyboard to  
• Sync memo: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up  
your memos.  
enter a key word or phrase to search for, and touch  
on the keyboard to search.  
• Auto tag settings: Touch Enable auto tag to enable auto  
tagging of your memos.  
2. Touch  
List to view your memos in a list mode.  
Touch an entry in the list on the left to view the memo  
on the right of the screen.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to  
display the following options:  
• Set as: Use this memo as a Contact photo  
screens Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper  
image.  
,
Home and lock  
,
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.  
• Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select  
3. Touch the body of the memo to edit the memo.  
Options display for editing. For more information, refer  
one or all memos, and touch Export  
• Share via: Touch AllShare Bluetooth  
Google+ Photo editor Picasa Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to  
.
,
,
Email, Gmail,  
,
,
,
Photo Editor  
To perfect any photos stored on your tablet, use Photo editor  
to crop, rotate, resize, adjust color and contrast, and much  
more.  
send memos to another device or another person. For more  
Memo Options  
While viewing a Memo:  
1. Touch  
Delete to delete this memo.  
Menu for the following options:  
Bluetooth Email Gmail  
Picasa Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to  
From a Home screen, touch  
Photo editor  
Apps  
2. Touch  
.
• Share via: Touch AllShare  
Google+ Photo editor  
send memos to another device or another person.  
• Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text) to  
export the memo to the selected app.  
,
,
,
,
Play Books  
Google eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your  
favorite books online and offline.  
,
,
,
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books  
Apps  
• Print: Send the memo to a Samsung printer.  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
     
Play Movies  
Play Store  
The Play Movies app is a new application for select Android  
devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play™ Store  
can be downloaded for offline viewing through this  
application. In addition, the Play Movies app can be used to  
stream your Google Play™ movie rentals as well as play any  
of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
Google Play Store provides access to downloadable  
applications and games to install on your device. It also  
allows you to provide feedback and comments about an  
application, or flag an application that might be incompatible  
with your device.  
Tip: A shortcut to Play Store displays on the main Home screen  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Movies  
Apps  
by default.  
.
For more information touch  
Menu  
Help.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Play Store.  
Play Music  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Store.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
If you are not already logged in with your Google  
account, the Add a Google Account screen displays.  
.
Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, or New  
to create a Google account.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. The first time you open Play Store, read the Google  
Play™ Terms of Service and then touch Accept to  
continue.  
4. Touch an app and then touch Allow automatic updating  
to enable automatic updating.  
5. Touch Open to open the app on your device.  
6. Touch Update to update the app on your device.  
3. To browse for items to install, touch Apps  
,
Games,  
Music Books, or Movies. Touch a tab, such as  
CATEGORIES, FEATURED, TOP PAID, or TOP FREE to  
refine your search.  
,
Pulse  
Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-sized pieces.  
Each article is a small square filled with the headline and an  
associated image. Pulse incorporates colorful panning story  
bars and fills them with content from your favorite websites.  
4. To get help for using Google Play™, touch  
Help  
Menu  
.
Updates to Downloaded Apps  
You can check for new versions of applications by visiting the  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Pulse.  
The Pulse main menu displays.  
Google Play Store. Items that have a new version available  
Quickoffice HD  
will say Update  
.
The Quickoffice® application allows you to create and save  
Microsoft Word, Excel, and Powerpoint documents. You can  
also view existing PDFs.  
You can also select apps that you would like to be updated  
automatically. To do this:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Installed Apps  
Play Store.  
To access the Quickoffice:  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Quickoffice HD  
Apps  
3. Touch the Installed tab to list the Play Store apps  
installed on your device.  
.
The Quickoffice Register your Software screen  
displays.  
Update is displayed if there is an update available for  
the app.  
Applications and Widgets  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Touch the E-mail Address field and use the keyboard to  
enter your E-mail address.  
The following document types are available: Word  
Document, Word 97-2003 Document, Excel Workbook,  
Excel 97-2003 Workbook, PowerPoint Presentation,  
and PowerPoint 97-2003 Presentation.  
Touch Please don’t ask me again, if you do not want to  
register later, and then touch Register Now  
.
6. To find a memo, touch  
Search, use the keyboard to  
– or –  
enter a key word or phrase to search for, and touch  
to start the search.  
Touch Register Later, if you are not ready to register at  
this time.  
The Search Results screen displays.  
The Quickoffice screen is displayed.  
7. To save your documents to a remote account, touch  
Add remote account, touch an account, and sign  
in. Touch Learn more about ... to read more about the  
selected account.  
3. Touch Internal Storage to display the folders and files  
on your device.  
4. Touch Recent Documents to view the documents you  
have recently updated.  
8. Touch  
Menu for these additional options:  
• Create folder: Touch the New folder name field and use the  
keyboard to name the folder. Touch Create to add the folder to  
selected folder.  
Tip: Sweep a folder list to the left or right to display the  
previous or next level of folders or files.  
5. To create a new document, touch  
New Document,  
• Sort: Sort files or folders by Name, Type, Size, or Date.  
• Updates: Check for updates for Quickoffice.  
touch an option, and follow the on-screen instructions.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Registration: If you touched Register Later when you signed  
in, use this option and touch Register Now  
Samsung Apps  
.
Connect to Samsung Apps and make your smart device even  
smarter. Simply and easily download an abundance of  
applications to your tablet such as games, news, reference,  
social networking, navigation, and more.  
• About: Displays information about the Quickoffice app.  
• Help: Displays the Quickoffice Help Guide and answers to  
frequently asked questions. You can also open a support ticket.  
9. Touch a document to open it. Touch and hold a  
document and drag it to one of the following icons:  
Rename to: Use the keyboard to rename the  
document and touch Rename.  
Tip: A shortcut to Samsung Apps displays on the main Home  
screen by default.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Samsung Apps.  
Send: Touch Bluetooth Email, or Gmail to send  
,
your document.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Samsung Apps.  
Delete: Touch OK to delete the document.  
10. Touch and drag a document to a new folder. Touch  
Copy to or Move to on the Action pop-up to copy or  
move the document to the highlighted folder.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
   
Search  
Social Hub  
Access your social networks, like Facebook, Twitter, and  
LinkedIn, and your email all in one place.  
Search the internet using the GoogleTM search engine.  
Tip: A shortcut to Social Hub appears on the main Home  
Tip: The Google Search widget displays by default on all Home  
screens. For information about displaying widgets on the  
screen by default.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Social Hub.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Google.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Social Hub.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Search.  
The Welcome to Social Hub screen displays.  
Settings  
Configure your device to your preferences.  
2. Touch Set up now to add an account.  
– or –  
Touch Set up later to skip adding an account and  
display the Social Hub Feeds screen.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
.
3. Touch the Feeds tab to display your social network  
feeds or touch the Messages tab to display your email  
and SNS messages.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Add an Account  
To add an account:  
Social Hub Messages Options  
To display Social Hub messages options:  
1. Touch Add account  
.
1. Touch the Messages tab.  
The Add account screen displays.  
2. Touch  
Menu.  
The following options display:  
2. Touch the account you want to add and then enter the  
required information, such as email address and  
password.  
• Delete: Touch the check box to select each message to delete,  
or touch Select all, then touch Delete  
.
The added account now appears on the Social Hub  
Accounts screen with any other accounts.  
• Accounts: Lists all accounts accessed by Social Hub.  
Touch Add account to add another account.  
Touch Remove account and touch the check box next to  
each account you want to delete, then touch Delete  
• Mark as unread: Touch the check box to select each message  
to mark as unread, then touch Mark  
3. Touch an account entry to start the application.  
.
Update Your Status  
To update your status:  
1. Touch the Feeds tab.  
.
• List by: Set how you want to list messages. Options are: Date  
(Most recent), Date (Oldest), or Sender.  
2. Touch  
Status update and use the keypad to enter  
your status.  
Talk  
3. Touch  
Photo to upload a picture or video, or take a  
picture or capture a video to upload.  
Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users.  
4. Touch  
Update to post your status and photos.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Talk.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
 
Task Manager  
View and manage active applications on your device.  
To launch Task Manager:  
Video Player  
View and manage videos stored on your tablet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Video Player  
Apps  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Task manager.  
Words Free  
– or –  
Play Words With Friends free, the number one mobile word  
game, with anyone who also has the app installed on their  
mobile device. Experience for yourself why millions of  
players are addicted to the word building, triple score  
seeking, chat bubble sending goodness of Words With  
Friends.  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager.  
To quickly display the Task manager pop-up:  
Touch and hold  
– or –  
Home.  
From any screen, touch  
bottom, center of the screen and then touch  
Task manager  
The Task manager pop-up displays.  
Mini App Tray at the  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Words Free  
Apps  
.
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to log in or create an  
account.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch the  
on the pop-up to add the city.  
World Clock  
View the date and time in any time zone.  
5. Touch  
Reorder to change the order of the cities.  
Touch the grid  
new position in the list. Touch Done to change the  
order.  
on an entry and drag the entry to a  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
World clock  
Apps  
.
A map of the world displays with the locations you  
have added flagged.  
6. Touch  
Remove to delete entries. Touch the box to  
check the cities you want to delete (a green check  
2. Touch  
Add to add a city to display.  
mark displays), then touch Remove  
.
A list of world cities displays in landscape mode.  
7. Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the  
DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings  
Time adjustments.  
3. Scroll through the list and touch the city you want to  
add.  
Yahoo! Finance  
Tip: Touch the first letter of the city’s name, to the right of the  
list, to find the city more quickly.  
Stay on top of the markets with the Yahoo! Finance app for  
Android devices. Get real-time quotes, follow the market, or  
check out a particular stock. View headline news, top stories,  
and videos from Tech Ticker. Yahoo! Finance lets you keep up  
with the market movers from your Android phone.  
– or –  
In portrait or landscape mode, touch and turn the globe  
to locate a city and touch the city you want to add.  
To add the Yahoo! Finance widget to a Home screen, see  
A pop-up displays the city name, the current time and  
date there, and the GMT offset.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
         
3. Touch  
Add to add another stock. For more  
Adding Your First Stock  
To add your first stock:  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
The Yahoo! Finance main screen displays with  
Samsung and Yahoo stocks listed by default.  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Delete: Touch to delete the stock being displayed.  
• Change order: Displays your stocks list. Touch and drag stocks  
to change the order in which they are displayed.  
• Search: Touch to search for a new stock.  
2. Touch  
3. Type in a stock name.  
4. Touch the key on the keyboard to start the search  
and touch an entry in the list of stocks that is  
Add.  
• Settings: Displays the following option:  
Auto refresh: Choose a time interval for automatic refreshing  
of stock information. The choices are: None, Every 30 minutes,  
Every 1 hour, and Every 3 hours. When the setting is None,  
touch the refresh icon on the Yahoo! Finance widget to update  
stock information.  
displayed.  
5. The Yahoo! Finance widget displays with information  
about the stock just added.  
Managing Stocks  
Once you add a stock, there are additional Yahoo! Finance  
options you can use to add more stocks and set up how they  
are displayed and refreshed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch an entry in the Yahoo!  
Finance widget.  
5. Under the My Stocks tab, touch a stock entry to display  
the full stock information screen.  
6. Touch the Major indices tab to display a summary of  
the performance of major groupings of stocks,  
classified by the exchange on which they trade.  
7. Touch the Currencies tab to display the currency  
exchange rate for various currencies.  
Information about the stock displays.  
2. Touch  
Refresh to update the information.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Options  
There are more options available from the full stock  
YouTube  
View and upload YouTube videos, right from your device.  
information screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
Tip: A shortcut to YouTube appears on the main Home screen  
The full stock information screen for one of your stocks  
displays.  
by default.  
2. If you have added more than one stock, touch a  
heading bar to display the full stock information screen  
for the stock.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
YouTube.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
3. Near the center of the screen, touch 1d (1 day),  
5d (5 days), 1m (1 month), 3m (3 months), 6m (6  
months), or 1y (1 year) to view a stock performance  
graph for the requested period.  
YouTube.  
4. At the bottom, right of the screen, touch Y! More  
Information to link to the Yahoo! Finance website.  
5. At the bottom of the screen, touch Quotes delayed to  
read about real-time exchange quotes and access  
other Yahoo! Finance online options, such as Top  
Stories and a currency converter.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
   
Section 11: Settings  
This section explains Settings for customizing your device.  
Wi-Fi  
Accessing Settings  
Your device supports Wi-Fi a/b/g/n. Use Wi-Fi settings to  
manage your device’s Wi-Fi connections.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
For more information about using your device’s Wi-Fi  
Settings.  
– or –  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
From any screen, touch the Time in the System Bar,  
When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically  
searches for available, in-range Wireless Access Points  
(WAPs).  
The Settings screen displays.  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Wi-Fi from the Quick Settings menu.  
The Settings Screen  
The Settings screen has tabs on the left side of the screen.  
Information related to the tabs displays on the right side of  
the screen. There are four major groups of settings: Wireless  
and network, Device, Personal, and System.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Wireless and Network  
Control your device’s wireless connections.  
Settings. On the Wi-Fi tab, touch the OFF / ON  
icon  
to turn Wi-Fi on or off.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Scan for Wi-Fi Networks  
Advanced Settings  
To make sure you have an accurate list of Wi-Fi networks.  
Set up and manage wireless access points.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi  
2. Touch  
The following options display:  
Apps  
Settings  
From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi, and then touch Scan  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
Menu  
Advanced.  
Add Wi-Fi Network  
To open a dialog where you can add a Wi-Fi network by  
entering its Network SSID (the name it broadcasts), security  
type, and other properties:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi, and then touch  
2. Use the keyboard to enter Network SSID  
• Network notification: Have your device alert you to new  
Wireless Access Points (WAPs). Touch Network notification to  
turn notifications On or Off. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
Apps  
Add network  
Settings  
.
.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: Specify when to disconnect from  
Wi-Fi. Option are: Always, Only when plugged in, or Never.  
• MAC address: View your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: View your device’s IP address.  
3. Touch the Security field and then touch a security type.  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
4. If necessary, touch Password and enter the password or  
hex key.  
5. Touch Save  
.
Settings  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
Bluetooth  
Use Bluetooth settings to manage Bluetooth connections, set  
your device’s name, and control your device’s visibility.  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Bluetooth  
Apps  
Settings  
.
To turn your device’s Bluetooth service On or Off:  
2. Touch Scan for devices to scan for nearby discoverable  
devices. After searching, touch a device to pair with it.  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Bluetooth from the Quick Settings menu.  
3. Touch  
configure:  
Menu and select a Bluetooth setting to  
– or –  
• Device name: Your device’s default name displays on screen.  
Touch to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is  
turned On.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Settings. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or off.  
Apps  
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
For more information about using Bluetooth to exchange  
information with other Bluetooth devices, see “Bluetooth” on  
• Show received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Airplane Mode  
Data Usage  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your tablet’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where accessing data is  
prohibited.  
From this screen you can view the Wi-Fi or Ethernet data  
usage.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Data usage  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and  
select a date.  
Important! When your tablet is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
access online information or applications.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
data usage by application.  
Press and hold the Power button then touch Airplane  
mode  
.
– or –  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
may account for data usage differently.  
More ...  
Airplane mode, touch the check box, and  
then touch OK to turn on Airplane mode.  
More Settings  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
information.  
A check mark  
appears in the check box when  
Airplane mode is On.  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies Air.  
From a Home screen, touch  
More ...  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... Kies via Wi-Fi  
2. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
Settings 174  
Apps  
Settings  
Options display for Airplane mode, Kies via Wi-Fi, VPN,  
and Wi-Fi Direct.  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Touch Save to save your VPN settings.  
VPN  
Connecting To a VPN  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
Settings  
More ... VPN  
.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
2. Touch the VPN to which you want to connect.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, enter any requested  
credentials.  
configure one.  
Adding a VPN  
4. Touch Connect  
.
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
Edit a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.  
Apps  
.
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Edit network  
.
Note: You must also set a screen unlock PIN or password  
before you can use credential storage. For more  
information, refer to “Screen Lock” on page 186.  
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.  
5. Touch Save  
.
Delete a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... VPN  
2. Touch Add VPN network  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Delete network  
Apps  
.
.
.
3. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided  
.
by your network administrator.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wi-Fi Direct Settings  
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service  
You can configure your device to connect directly with other  
Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data  
between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi  
Direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a  
hot spot or WAP.  
active and running before it is detected by your device.  
The direct connection establishes, the status field  
displays “Connected”, and your connected device is  
displayed in the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.  
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi  
network connection.  
Device  
This section of the Settings screen contains settings for your  
device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More ... Wi-Fi Direct  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Sound  
General  
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Wi-Fi Direct  
on.  
Set the volume level for all types of sounds.  
Your device begins to search for other devices enabled  
with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
Note: You can only set volume when Silent Mode is disabled.  
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
4. When scanning is complete, touch a device name to  
begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct  
compatible device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Volume  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Settings  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Touch and drag the sliders to set the volume for:  
• Music video games and other media: Sounds made by  
Notifications  
Select a default ringtone for message, alarm, and other  
notifications.  
,
,
,
music apps, video apps, and more.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Default notifications.  
Apps  
Settings  
• Notifications: Sounds for alerts to new messages and other  
events.  
2. Touch a ringtone to hear a sample and select it.  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
• System: Application sounds and other sounds made by your  
device.  
Set your tablet to make sounds and vibrate:  
Tip: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Sound and vibration.  
Apps  
Settings  
pressing the Volume Key.  
2. Touch the check box to turn on Sound and vibration  
3. Touch OK to save your settings.  
mode.  
Set the intensity of vibration for notifications and screen  
touch feedback.  
A check mark  
appears in the check box when  
Sound and vibration mode is On.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound  
2. Touch Vibration intensity  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
3. Touch and drag the Notification or Vibrate on screen tap  
slider to set the vibration intensity.  
4. Touch OK to save your settings.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System  
Display  
Screen Display  
Home Screen and Lock Screen Wallpaper  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen or  
Lock screen. Choose from preloaded wallpaper images or  
select a photo you have downloaded or taken with the  
Camera.  
You can activate or deactivate both touch and screen lock  
sounds.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Touch sounds or Screen lock sound (both default  
to On).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper  
The Select wallpaper from screen displays the  
following options: Gallery Live wallpapers, and  
Wallpapers  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
.
.
3. Touch Vibrate on screen tap to enable or disable  
vibration when you touch or tap the screen.  
,
When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check  
.
box. When Vibrate on screen tap is enabled, the device  
vibrates to indicate screen touches and other  
interactions.  
To show help text on the lock screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Help text  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Settings  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Touch Auto-rotate screen to enable or disable the  
auto-rotate feature  
General  
Brightness  
.
Set the default screen brightness.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Tip: Touch the Time in the System Bar to display the Quick  
Settings pop-up. Touch Screen rotation to enable or  
disable the auto-rotate feature. For more information,  
Apps  
Settings  
Display  
2. Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or touch  
Automatic brightness  
Brightness.  
.
Quick Launch  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
The Quick Launch feature allows you to set multifunctional  
softkey to open applications.  
Screen Mode  
Set the screen mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Quick launch  
3. Touch None Screen capture  
Camera  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Display  
Screen mode  
.
.
2. Touch Dynamic  
,
Standard, or Movie then touch OK  
.
,
,
Applications, Search, or  
Auto-Rotate Screen  
.
When this option is checked, the screen orientation changes  
when you rotate the device. When this option is not checked,  
the screen orientation locks in the current orientation  
(landscape or portrait) and the orientation does not change  
when you rotate the device.  
If you choose Screen capture, touch the softkey to  
capture an image of the current screen and edit the  
image. Touch and hold to capture and add an image of  
the current screen to the clipboard.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
.
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The screen image is saved in the /Root/Pictures/  
Auto Adjust Screen Power  
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the  
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
Screen Timeout  
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen  
touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).  
.
2. Touch Auto adjust screen power to enable or disable the  
mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
.
2. Touch Screen timeout and select the screen delay time.  
The screen delays shutting off after inactivity for the  
selected period of time.  
Power Saving  
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the  
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.  
Font Style and Size  
Set the font for screen displays and the size you want it to  
display.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Power saving  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Custom power saving to enable or disable the  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
mode.  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
2. Touch Font style then touch a font or touch Get fonts  
online to browse and download a new font.  
3. Touch Font size and select a font size.  
Settings  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Touch Custom power saving settings to refine your  
Device Memory  
power saving settings.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
Touch Power saving starts at to set when power saving starts.  
Options are: 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% battery power.  
Check the appropriate box to turn off Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, or  
Sync.  
.
The Device memory displays as Total space, Apps,  
Pictures, videos, Audio, Downloads, Miscellaneous  
files, and Available space.  
Touch Brightness to adjust screen brightness. Touch the  
second Brightness option to set the brightness to 10, 30, 50,  
70, or 100 percent.  
Battery  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Battery  
Apps  
Settings  
Touch Screen timeout to set the length of delay between the  
last key press or screen touch and the automatic screen  
timeout (dim and lock).  
.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
Touch  
OK to save your settings.  
4. Touch Learn about power saving to display more  
2. Touch Screen or Android System to view how the  
display and the Android system are affecting battery  
use.  
information about saving power.  
Storage  
From this menu you can view the device memory.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
use.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloaded  
Applications  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
You can download and install applications from Google Play  
or create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Applications settings to manage  
applications.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Applications  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Downloaded to view a list of all the downloaded  
applications on your device.  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
Downloaded tabs, touch Touch  
size or Sort by name  
Menu  
Sort by  
.
4. Touch an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
The following options are displayed:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Applications  
Apps  
Settings  
• Force stop: Stops an app that is misbehaving. Restart your  
device if stopping an app, process, or service causes your  
device to stop working correctly.  
.
2. Touch Downloaded or Running to display memory  
usage for that category of applications.  
• Uninstall: Deletes the application from the tablet.  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Settings  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Clear data: Clears application data from memory.  
• Clear cache: If the app stores data in a temporary area of the  
device's memory, and the amount of information stored is  
displayed, touch this button to clearing the temporary storage.  
• Clear defaults: If you have configured an app to launch  
certain file types by default, clear that setting.  
3. Touch Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Touch Show services in use  
to switch back.  
4. Touch one of the applications to view application  
information.  
The following options display:  
• Permissions: Lists the kinds of information about your device  
and data to which the app has access.  
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
Running Services  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
View and control services running on your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Applications  
2. Touch the Running tab.  
Settings  
.
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
All the applications that are currently running on the  
device display.  
Note: Options vary by application.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
3. Touch Remove account, then touch Remove account  
Apps  
Settings  
Personal  
.
This section of the Settings screen lets you manage the  
personal settings for your device.  
Accounts and Sync  
Set up and manage accounts, including your Google and  
email accounts.  
at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
Synchronizing Account  
Adding an Account  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch Add account  
3. Touch one of the account types.  
Apps  
Settings  
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Touch  
Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.  
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
3. On the Auto-sync field, touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Auto-sync on or off, which controls whether  
changes you make to information on your device or on  
the web are automatically synced with each other.  
Tip: For more information about the types of accounts that you  
Removing an Account  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
Settings  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Data and Synchronization  
Use Wireless Networks  
To sync account information manually:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Use wireless networks option or enable the GPS  
satellites.  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and sync  
.
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Location services  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch Sync Now to synchronize all data for the selected  
.
account.  
– or –  
2. Touch Use wireless networks to enable location  
information using the wireless network.  
Use GPS Satellites  
Under Data and synchronization, touch the account  
data to synchronize, such as, Calendar, Contacts,  
Email, and so on.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Location services  
.
Location Services  
2. Touch Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
You value your privacy. So, by default, your device only  
acquires your location when you allow it. To use  
Location-Based Services, you must first enable location  
services on your device.  
Location and Google Search  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Location services  
.
2. Touch Location and Google search to use your location  
data for improved Google Search results and other  
Google services.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Lock Automatically  
Use this option to set how quickly to lock the screen after the  
screen automatically turns off.  
Security  
Screen Lock  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Lock automatically and touch an option.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Screen lock for these settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; 1, 2, 5,  
10, or 30 minutes.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required.  
Vibrate On Screen Tap  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Vibrate on screen tap  
Apps  
Settings  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
.
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
Note: Additional options are available only if you set Screen  
lock to display the lock screen (any setting other than  
Swipe or None).  
Settings  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Owner Information  
Find My Mobile  
Use this option to enable or disable whether to show owner  
information on the lock screen.  
To allow your device to be locked and tracked, and for your  
data to be deleted remotely. You must sign up for both a  
Samsung account and Google account to use Remote  
controls.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Sign In To Your Samsung Account  
2. Touch Owner information and then touch Show owner  
info on lock screen to enable or disable the option.  
3. Touch the text field and use the keyboard to enter the  
text to display on the lock screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Remote controls  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
If you are not signed on to your Google account, a  
message displays Register Google account first. For  
Encryption  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet  
each time you power it on:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
The Samsung account screen displays.  
2. Touch Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
3. Touch variety of services to display information about  
displayed help screen.  
Samsung services that are available.  
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Encryption takes an hour or more.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. If you have no Samsung account:  
The Accounts and sync screen displays with your  
Samsung Account listed under Manage accounts.  
Touch Create new account.  
The Country or region list displays.  
Touch a country in the list (for example, United States) and  
Enable or Disable Remote Controls  
Once you have signed in to your Samsung Account, you can  
enable or disable Remote controls.  
touch OK  
.
The Samsung account Terms and conditions screen displays.  
Touch Privacy policy to display the Samsung Privacy Policy.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security Remote controls.  
Apps  
Settings  
Touch I accept all the terms above and then touch Agree to  
2. Enter your Samsung account password in the pop-up  
continue or touch  
sync screen.  
Back to return to the Accounts and  
Enter password field.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
– or –  
If you do have a Samsung account, touch Sign in  
The Samsung account screen displays.  
5. Use the keyboard to enter the required information and  
touch Sign up or Sign in  
.
SamsungDive Web Page  
To launch the SamsungDive web page:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Security  
SamsungDive web page.  
.
2. Touch the Help tab to display more information about  
Tip: The password is for your Samsung account, not the  
password you use for the email address you are entering.  
Plus, you can use only letters, numbers, !, @, $, %, &, ^,  
and * for your Samsung account password.  
Remote Controls.  
Settings  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passwords  
3. Read the message and touch OK to allow installation of  
non-Google Play applications.  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
touch them while entering passwords.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Warning! Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
2. Touch Make passwords visible to enable or disable brief  
displays of password characters.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Credential Storage  
Trusted Credentials  
Device Administration  
To add or remove device administrators:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Security  
2. Touch Device administrators  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
Settings  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Trusted credentials  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
Enable or disable installation of non-Google Play  
applications.  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Unknown sources.  
An informational pop-up displays.  
Apps  
.
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Touch a CA certificate to examine its details.  
Clear Credentials  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
Clear stored credentials.  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and touch  
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to  
remove a User certificate.  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
certificates.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
.
2. Touch Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
Language and Input  
Language  
Set the language used by your device.  
5. Touch OK to return to the certificate list.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input Language  
2. Touch a language / locale from the list.  
Apps  
.
Settings  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Install from Device Storage  
Install encrypted certificates from a storage device, such as a  
PC, with the USB cable.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Install from device storage, then choose a  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Settings  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keyboards and Input Methods  
Set the keyboard used by your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Configuring the Samsung Keypad  
To configure the Samsung keypad:  
Apps  
Settings  
Touch  
next to Samsung keypad to display the  
Language and input  
2. Touch Default and select a keyboard.  
The options are: Samsung keypad and Swype.  
3. Touch Configure input methods  
.
following options:  
• Input language: Used to set a default text entry language.  
Touch this field, scroll through the options, and touch the  
desired input language. When activated, a check appears in  
the box.  
.
4. Touch Google voice typing to automatically use Google  
• XT9: Enable or disable XT9 predictive text. When enabled the  
system suggests words matching your text entries, and,  
optionally, completes common words automatically.  
voice typing.  
5. Touch  
next to Google voice typing, then touch  
Select input languages  
.
When XT9 is enabled, touch the XT9 advanced settings field to  
set the following options:  
Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
Word completion: Enable or disable automatic word  
completion for words matching your text entries.  
Word completion point: Choose the number of letters for the  
system to use to predict words for automatic completion.  
Spell correction: Enable or disable automatic spell checking  
and correction.  
6. Touch Block offensive words to enable or disable  
blocking of recognized offensive words from the results  
of your voice-input Google searches.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the  
next word based on common usage patterns.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Auto-substitution: When enabled, the system automatically  
replaces words you enter with words from the XT9 auto-  
substitution list.  
• Voice input: Enable or disable the Voice input feature. When  
enabled, you can choose to enter text by speaking the words,  
using Google’s networked speech recognition feature.  
• Sound on keypress: Check to play a brief sound each time you  
touch a key on the on-screen keyboard.  
Regional correction: When enabled, the system automatically  
changes the spelling of words based on norms for your locale.  
Recapture: When enabled, the system re-displays matching  
words when you make corrections to a word inserted by the  
system.  
Tutorial: Displays help for using the Samsung keyboard and  
XT9 predictive text.  
Configuring the Swype Keypad  
XT9 my words: Add words to your XT9 predictive text  
dictionary.  
To configure the Swype keypad:  
Touch  
next to Swype to display the following  
XT9 auto-substitution: Manage the list of words the system  
uses for auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be  
enabled).  
options:  
Select Input Method  
For more information, refer to “Keyboards and Input  
• Automatic full stop: Enable or disable automatic insertion of a  
“full stop” (period and space to end a sentence) by touching the  
space bar twice.  
Methods” on page 191.  
How to Swype  
Displays Swype help information. Touch a topic to view the  
information.  
• Auto-capitalization: Enable or disable auto-capitalization.  
When enabled, the system automatically capitalizes words in  
your text based on common usage, such as at the beginning of  
sentences.  
Personal dictionary  
Add words to or delete words from your personal Swype  
dictionary. Touch to add words and to remove words.  
+
Settings  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preferences  
Language Options  
• Audio feedback: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter  
text.  
Allows you to select the languages available from the Swype  
keyboard. To choose the desired language, touch the language  
key  
.
• Vibrate on keypress: When enabled, the device vibrates on  
text entry.  
Speech  
• Show tips: Turn on helpful tips from Swype.  
• Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically  
when you pause entering text.  
Set the speech settings for Voice search.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Language and input  
2. Touch Voice search to configure:  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
Settings  
.
• Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes  
the first letter of the first word in a sentence.  
• Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the  
Swype trace.  
• SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images  
from the results of your voice-input Google searches.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
• Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching  
words as you enter text.  
• Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text  
recognition.  
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example,  
the contents of email messages.  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: Delete all words you have added to  
the Swype dictionary.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Version: View the current Swype software version.  
2. Touch Text-to-speech output and select the preferred  
TTS engine.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch  
configure.  
next to the preferred TTS engine and  
Back Up and Reset  
Backup and Restore  
Back Up My Data  
4. Configure the following:  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
Enable or disable backup of your information to the Google  
server.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.  
Mouse/trackpad  
2. Touch Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Backup Account  
2. Touch Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to  
go faster or to the left to go slower.  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch OK to save your setting.  
.
2. Touch Backup account and touch your Google Gmail  
account or touch Add account to set your Google Gmail  
account to be backed up to the Google server.  
Settings  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Restore  
3. Touch Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
the reset.  
When enabled, backed-up settings are restored when you  
reinstall an application.  
Note: If you have set up your Samsung account, it has to be  
deleted before performing this function. For more  
information, refer to “Removing an Account” on  
page 184.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
Personal Data  
System  
Factory Data Reset  
Dock  
Use Factory data reset to return your device to its factory  
defaults. This setting erases all data from the device,  
including Google or other email account settings, system and  
application data and settings, and downloaded applications,  
as well as your music, photos, videos, and other files. If you  
reset the tablet in this way, the next time you turn on your  
tablet you are prompted to reenter the same kind of  
information as when you first started Android.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Dock  
.
2. Touch Dock sound  
.
The tablet will not play sounds when inserting and  
removing the device from the dock when enabled.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
2. Touch Factory data reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Date and Time  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Google  
By default, your device receives date and time information  
from the wireless network. When you are outside network  
coverage, you may want to set date and time information  
manually using the Date & time settings.  
Play and manage their use here.  
Services  
Enable or disable accessibility services.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Date and time  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Note: You must activate Accessibility before enabling services.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch TalkBack to activate TalkBack.  
Apps  
Settings  
• Set date: Enter the current date (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
.
• Set time: Enter the current time (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
• Select time zone: Choose your local time zone (only available  
when the Automatic setting is disabled).  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
• Use 24-hour format: Set the format for time displays.  
• Select date format: Set the format for date displays.  
3. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn TalkBack on.  
4. Touch Settings to configure TalkBack.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
Settings  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System  
Motion  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
It is possible to control certain aspects of your tablet by  
simply tilting it. You can tilt your tablet to reduce or enlarge  
the screen. You can move an icon from one Home page to  
another by panning your device to the left or right while  
holding the icon.  
.
• Font size: Set a font size. Options are: Tiny, Small, Normal,  
Large, and Huge.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Motion  
2. Touch Motion activation to make the following options  
Apps  
Settings  
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotates the screen from  
landscape to portrait orientation and vice versa.  
• Speak passwords: Speaks passwords to enter them.  
Tap and hold delay: Touch a delay time. Options are: Short,  
Medium, and Long.  
.
available. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
each option.  
to activate  
Touch Tilt to zoom or Pan to edit  
Touch Sensitivity to set the sensitivity by dragging the slider  
between Slow and Fast  
.
• Install Web scripts: Touch Allow to allow applications to install  
scripts from Google that make their Web content more  
accessible.  
.
Touch Test to test your setting, OK to save your changes, or  
Cancel to stop without making the change.  
Touch Learn about tilt or Learn about panning for more  
information.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Developer Options  
Set options for application development.  
USB Debugging  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
.
2. Touch Allow mock locations to enable or disable the  
setting.  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
2. Touch USB debugging to enable or disable the setting.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Desktop Backup Password  
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Developer options  
2. Touch Desktop backup password  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Settings  
.
Development Device ID  
.
The identification number for your tablet when using it as a  
development tool displays in this field.  
3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup  
password, the new password for full backups, then  
enter the new password again.  
Allow Mock Locations  
This setting is used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
4. Touch Set backup password to save the password  
change.  
Settings  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
User Interface  
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the  
way the screen behaves when using applications or  
displaying data.  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
Apps  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch the check box next to each option to enable:  
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
Developer options  
.
2. Touch Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as  
soon as the application is closed.  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
3. Touch Limit background processes to set the number of  
processes that can run in the background. Options are:  
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4  
processes at most.  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
4. Touch Show all ANRs to display a prompt when  
applications running in the background are not  
responding.  
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Model number: Display your device’s model number.  
• Android version: Display the firmware version of your device.  
• Kernel version: Display the kernel version of your device.  
• Build number: Display your device’s build number.  
About Device  
View information about your device, including status, legal  
information, hardware and software versions, and battery  
use.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch items to view details:  
Apps  
Settings  
Software Update  
.
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device  
to connect to the network and download any new software  
directly to your device. The device automatically updates  
with the latest available software when you access this  
option.  
• Software update: Connect to the network and download new  
software. For more information, refer to “Software Update”  
on page 200.  
• Status: View Battery status, Battery level, IP address, Wi-Fi  
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and  
Device status.  
Note: Before you can check for system updates, you must set  
• Legal information: Display Open source licenses  
,
Google  
legal, and License settings information.  
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and  
information about registering your device to play DivX  
®
protected video, touch License settings  
DivX VOD  
.
Settings  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Software Update Options  
Once you have set up your Gmail account, you can check for  
a software update.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch Software update  
The following options display:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
• Update: Touch this option to check for a software update. The  
Software update pop-up displays. Touch OK. The device  
automatically updates the software, if available. Otherwise,  
when the No update available prompt displays, touch OK  
.
• Auto update: Enable this option to allow your device to  
automatically check for updates monthly.  
• Push message: Enable or disable whether you want to be  
notified of an available software.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Health and Safety Information  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your Galaxy Tab. The terms “GALAXY” or “mobile  
device” are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab.  
Read this information before using your mobile device.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the  
same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as  
a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information  
refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it  
may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell  
phone network.  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
         
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-  
center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Health and Safety Information  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-  
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure  
that safety standards continue to adequately protect the  
public.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these  
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike  
“hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere  
with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced  
to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in  
RF absorption.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and  
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the  
exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S.  
Government.  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
devices employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this  
model device as reported to the FCC are:  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at  
its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at  
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to  
reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of  
the mobile device.  
2.4 GHz - Body: 0.97 W/kg  
5.2 GHz - Body: 0.72 W/kg  
5.3 GHz - Body: 0.78 W/kg  
5.5 GHz - Body: 0.79 W/kg  
5.8 GHz - Body: 0.75 W/kg  
SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can  
be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses  
the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed  
somewhere on the case of the mobile device.  
Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the  
public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does  
not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for  
each model mobile device are performed in positions and  
locations (e.g. near the body) as required by the FCC.  
Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile  
device, follow the instructions on the website and it should  
provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be  
For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested  
and meets FCC SAR guidelines.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
 
obtained at  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more  
of the following measures:  
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-  
cellular-telephones.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Tablet  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -  
unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your  
circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions  
require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver’s clear view of the street and traffic.  
If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow  
these tips:  
Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or  
e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
Secure your mobile device within easy reach;  
Chat when you are not moving;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Battery Use and Safety  
Plan chats when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the chat if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up information while driving;  
The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the  
consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to  
be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for  
inspection and replacement.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
   
Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with  
liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXY’s circuits, leading to  
corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears  
to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a  
safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them  
checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if  
they appear to be working properly.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your GALAXY.  
WARNING!  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause  
the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp  
battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave  
oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in  
your car in high temperatures.  
.
Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some  
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories.  
If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is  
compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging  
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a  
possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious  
Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The  
GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on  
a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If  
you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service  
center for inspection.  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.  
injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard  
.
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:  
1-800-822-8837 for more information.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to:  
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
explode.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable  
UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
           
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).  
Changes may affect the performance of location-based  
technology on your mobile device.  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile  
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless  
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if  
you use applications that require location-based information  
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit  
location-based information. The location-based information  
may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless  
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other  
third-parties providing services.  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
GPS  
GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for  
location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled  
by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes  
implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
Emergency Communication  
If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate  
drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer,  
because this may damage the mobile device and could  
cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device  
with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to  
you or damage to the mobile device.  
.
GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential  
communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or  
communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not  
designed or intended to be used for such communications.  
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be  
used on GALAXY to make phone calls do not support 911  
calls and are only intended for talking with friends.  
Extreme heat or cold  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Microwaves  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Dust and Dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
   
Paint  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
Responsible Listening  
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the  
most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some  
scientific research suggests that using portable audio  
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at  
high volume settings for long durations may lead to  
permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use  
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth®  
or other wireless devices).  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
Internet:  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Internet:  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Implantable Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Internet:  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
Persons who have such devices:  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
When your Device is Wet  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous  
and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories  
cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although  
your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of  
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,  
bending, or sitting on it.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
Other Important Safety Information  
FCC Notice  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty  
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty  
applicable to the device.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your  
vehicle are securely mounted.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
Section 13: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“SAMSUNG”)  
warrants that SAMSUNG’s devices and accessories  
(“Products”) are free from defects in material and  
workmanship under normal use and service for the period  
commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Tablet  
1 Year  
1 Year  
Batteries (Including  
Internal Batteries)  
Case  
90 Days  
Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of  
Product by Purchaser.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for  
which it is specified.  
equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on  
the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is  
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This  
Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not  
transferable or assignable to any other person or entity.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser  
must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service  
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied  
by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller's name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG's obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product,  
without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option,  
refund the purchase price.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping,  
and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt,  
reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing  
any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt,  
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will  
be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other  
repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period  
Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any  
contents of the Product before delivering the Product to  
SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the  
contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of  
warranty service.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability?  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR,  
OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;  
LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY,  
GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE;  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE  
DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG  
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person's or entity's Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Severability  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA,  
which includes computer software and may include  
associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic  
documentation (“Software”).  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS  
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL  
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE  
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS  
OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS  
EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE “DECLINE” BUTTON, AND  
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.  
85 Challenger Road  
Ridgefield Park, New Jersey 07660  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
©2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions  
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run  
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third  
machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided  
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other  
proprietary notices contained on the original.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after  
the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless  
we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use  
Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed  
for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the  
upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the  
Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and  
its affiliates may collect and use technical information  
gathered as part of the product support services related to  
the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software.  
Samsung may use this information solely to improve its  
products or to provide customized services or technologies to  
you and will not disclose this information in a form that  
personally identifies you.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to  
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,  
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the  
third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees  
that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or  
indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to  
caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any  
such third-party content, products, or services available on  
or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges  
and agrees that your use of any third-party application is  
governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of  
Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such  
agreement and that any information or personal data you  
provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-  
party application provider, will be subject to such third-party  
application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists.  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES  
OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the  
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this  
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all  
copies, full or partial, of the Software.  
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations  
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG  
has no control over such applications, Purchaser  
acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible  
for the availability of such applications and is not responsible  
or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or  
other materials on or available from such applications.  
Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of  
third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that  
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance,  
accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to  
take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects  
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,  
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY  
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR  
RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR  
OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY  
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT,  
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER  
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT  
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET  
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF  
THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED  
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES  
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR,  
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR  
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR  
INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY  
PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER  
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY.  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION  
AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY  
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER  
PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE  
DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE”  
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM  
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST  
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW,  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED,  
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE  
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF  
ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES  
CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS,  
12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products  
provided to the United States Government pursuant to  
solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided  
with the commercial rights and restrictions described  
elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the  
United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued  
prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED  
RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE  
1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as  
applicable.  
INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR  
TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT,  
NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION  
OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOT  
WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES,  
CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE  
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT  
OF PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS  
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically  
governs your use of the software which forms part of, or enables  
you to access, the Service; and  
Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of  
personal information in connection with your access to and use of  
the Service.  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral  
or written communications, proposals and representations  
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter  
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to  
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions  
shall continue in full force and effect.  
By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above  
documents. Please read through those documents to make  
sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is  
providing the Service to you.  
You will be able to access additional features available at  
.
Social Hub Terms and Conditions  
Acceptance of the Terms  
Social Hub  
Legal Terms and Privacy  
These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the  
Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence  
Agreement (collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social  
Hub, which comprises all content and services accessible  
through Social Hub (including third party content and  
services), and (if applicable) the website where you  
accessed these Terms (collectively the "Service"). The Terms  
constitute an agreement between you and Samsung  
Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where  
you accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the "Service"), is  
being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co.,  
Ltd., and its affiliates and suppliers (collectively "Samsung")  
subject to the following enclosed documents:  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the  
Service generally;  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively  
"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the  
Service, you agree to be legally bound to the Terms.  
Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the  
Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service. The  
person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally  
competent.  
You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to  
the Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law,  
Samsung reserves the right to modify, update, supplement,  
revise or otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or  
additional rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to  
the Service, from time to time with or without notice to you  
("Amendments").  
Your Information  
When required to provide information in connection with your  
use of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and  
complete information. Providing misleading information  
about your identity is forbidden. When you first use the  
Service, you may be required to create a username and a  
password.  
Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by  
sending an email message to the email address listed in your  
account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the  
Social Hub website.  
You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are  
personally responsible for any use of the Service with your  
username and password.  
Such Amendments will be effective immediately and  
incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such  
notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms.  
Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to  
You agree to take due care in protecting your username and  
password against misuse by others and promptly notify  
Samsung about any misuse.  
Termination of Service  
constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments.  
Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain  
parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have  
breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion.  
Eligibility  
To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of  
age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a  
minor for legal purposes where you live, you must review the  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing,  
libelous or other inappropriate Material;  
Your Material  
Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung  
shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or  
content you have submitted in the course of using the  
Service ("Material") when your access to the Service is  
terminated. Your submission of Material in the course of  
using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the  
Material to Samsung. After the Material is removed from the  
Service by either you or Samsung, some traces of the  
Material may remain and copies of the Material may still  
reside within the servers used in providing the Service.  
However, Samsung does not claim ownership in your  
Material.  
Respect the privacy of others;  
Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required  
for you to have the legal right to submit any Material; and  
Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain  
letters, pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that  
may harm the Service, or the interest or property of the Service  
users.  
Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in  
contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in  
criminal prosecution and/or civil liability.  
You represent and warrant that you have obtained any  
consents, permission or licenses that may be required for  
you to have the legal right to submit any Material. Samsung  
reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if  
Samsung determines, at its sole discretion, that you have  
repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service.  
Restrictions  
You and any third party directed by You must not display,  
copy, store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service  
(whether all or any portion of it), and such displaying,  
copying, storing, modification, sale, publishing and  
redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all  
necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the  
owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part.  
Using the Service  
You agree to:  
Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;  
Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You must not use the Service for any purposes other than  
those permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this  
restriction, you must not use the service for any illegal  
purposes, to make unsolicited offers or advertisements, to  
impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or  
entity, to misrepresent, harass, defraud or defame others, to  
post obscene or unreasonably offensive material, to  
negatively present the Service, nor for any commercial  
purposes.  
Actions Required by Law  
Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/or  
data retention requirements imposed by your country of  
residence or any other country in which you use the Service.  
Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or  
terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole  
discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or  
regulatory agencies to do so.  
Third Party Sites and Content  
Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to  
the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from  
restraining you from doing so, you are not allowed to  
disassemble, reverse engineer, tamper with the Service,  
transmit malicious code or collect information of other users  
through the Service.  
The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that  
are owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites  
does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the  
conduct, products or services on the site. Upon accessing  
any such site, you must review and agree to the rules of use  
of the relevant site before using the site.  
You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of  
or tamper with the Service or any content or service  
contained in or provided through the Service, or any servers  
used in providing the Service, or to unreasonably affect  
others' enjoyment of the Service in any way.  
You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control  
over the content, products or services of third-party sites and  
does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such  
content, products or services. Third party content and  
services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and  
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any  
content or service will remain available for any period of  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
time. Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or  
liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party  
content or service.  
Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or  
any part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any  
particular jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service,  
you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk, and you  
are responsible for complying with all US federal, state and  
local laws, rules and regulations.  
In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for  
customer service related to third party sites. Any question or  
request for service relating to third party sites should be  
made directly to the relevant site operator.  
Dealings with Others  
You may interact with other users on or through the Service.  
You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung  
and are solely between you and the other user(s).  
Subscription Information  
Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through  
your service provider's network. Your network service  
provider may charge you for such data transmission.  
Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any  
such charges.  
Intellectual Property  
The Service and related software are protected under  
international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that  
copyrights are claimed by Samsung.  
Availability  
The Service may be network dependent - contact your  
network service provider for more information. Samsung  
reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve  
and correct the Service. The Service may not be available  
during maintenance breaks and other times. Samsung may  
also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in  
its sole discretion. In such case you will be provided with  
prior notification.  
Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and  
interest in the Service and in all Samsung's products,  
software and other properties provided to you or used by you  
through the Service.  
Personal Data  
The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional  
provisions govern the use of your personal information. When  
you access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
collect certain personal information such as your email  
address along with your user name and password and, in  
certain cases, your mobile phone number so that we can  
communicate with you, for example to send notifications of  
incoming messages. When you use the Service, certain  
technical information such as the type and serial number of  
your mobile device, Internet protocol address, your mobile  
network and country codes, timezone, technical details of  
your client as well as your transactions with Samsung, for  
example your acceptance of the Terms, will be automatically  
collected by Samsung.  
Samsung's servers, Samsung will not process the content or  
headers of your messages for any purpose other than as  
necessary to deliver and manage your messages, unless  
otherwise required by law.  
In connection with certain services accessible via the  
Service, Samsung may cooperate with your operator and  
other third parties. Samsung may receive from such third  
parties certain device specific non-personal information,  
such as device serial number of the devices sold by the  
operator with preinstalled software for the Service. Such  
information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the  
Service.  
The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are  
explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also  
participate with your selected service providers in  
maintaining your contact lists.  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE"  
BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW  
AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT  
WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR  
ERROR OR VIRUS-FREE.  
The third party services and content you access through the  
Service and the telecommunications carriers and the  
network through which you access the Service are provided  
and hosted by your selected third party content and service  
providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own. We  
recommend you familiarize yourself with your service  
provider's privacy policy. Samsung is not responsible for the  
privacy or any other practices of such service providers.  
Although your messages will be transmitted through  
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND  
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
 
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE  
AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE,  
INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED  
THROUGH THE SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND  
ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR  
SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT  
FROM VARIOUS SOURCES.  
IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE  
PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR  
INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS.  
CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW  
MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE  
OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE  
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE  
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A  
LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO  
THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE STATUTORY  
PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS  
ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER  
THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF  
SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN; OR  
(B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES  
SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A) THE  
REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF  
EQUIVALENT GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE  
PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF  
ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF  
THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED.  
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY  
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE  
ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG  
BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED  
ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES.  
YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES,  
LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED  
BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL  
INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL  
MISCONDUCT, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH  
RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE (INCLUDING DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES).  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indemnification  
Miscellaneous  
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung  
from and against any and all third party claims and all  
liabilities, assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting  
from or arising out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your  
infringement or violation of any intellectual property, other  
rights or privacy of a third party, iii) misuse of the Service by  
a third party where such misuse was made possible due to  
your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your  
username and password against misuse.  
The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms)  
constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung,  
and supersedes any prior agreement between you and  
Samsung, with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of  
any third-party content or service accessed via the Service  
will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with,  
and applicable to that content or service. If any provision of  
the Terms is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that  
portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner  
consistent with applicable law to reflect, as nearly as  
possible, the original intentions of the parties, and the  
remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and  
effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or provision of  
the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision, or  
any other provision of the Terms.  
Choice of Law  
Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided  
otherwise herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of  
the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law  
provisions.  
You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive  
jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York  
to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms.  
Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be  
allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type  
of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.  
Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to  
fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is  
due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control  
of Samsung. If there is any conflict between these Social Hub  
Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the  
provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
prevail. The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by  
their nature should survive termination of your use of the  
Service shall remain valid after any such termination.  
as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our  
collection, use, disclosure, management and storage of your  
personal information as described below. We may, from time  
to time, transfer or merge any personal information collected  
off-line to our online databases or store off-line information  
in an electronic format. We may also combine personal  
information we collect online with information available from  
other sources, including information received from our  
affiliates, marketing companies, or advertisers. This Privacy  
Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in  
full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service,  
even if your use of or participation in any particular service,  
feature, function or promotional activity terminates, expires,  
ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any reason.  
Social Hub Privacy Policy  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to  
protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers  
to our Social Hub service. This privacy policy ( "Privacy  
Policy") forms part of the Terms which govern your use of  
Social Hub(excluding any third party content and services),  
and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this  
Privacy Policy, (collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of  
the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of  
information we gather about you when you access or use the  
Service, how we may use that information, and if and how  
we disclose it to third parties.  
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT  
Personal Information  
All users of the Service are required to provide true, current,  
complete and accurate personal information when prompted  
and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in  
good faith to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or  
inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy.  
We may request that you supply us with "personal"  
information, such as your name, e-mail address, mailing  
address, home or work telephone number in the course of  
you accessing or using the Service, such as via registration  
forms, surveys, and polls. In each such case, you will know  
what categories of information we collect because you will  
actively provide the information to us. You may not be able to  
We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent  
in relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such  
consent, your access or use of the Service will be construed  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if  
you choose not to provide certain information. If you do  
choose to give us personal information through the Service,  
we will collect and retain that information.  
use aggregated non-personal information about our users to  
understand the demographics of users of the Service, such  
as the percentage of male and female users, the geographic  
distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a  
combination of these and/or other demographics. We may  
also use the personal or non-personal information we collect  
to analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the  
content of the Service, and for marketing and promotional  
efforts.  
Non-Personal Information  
When you use the Service, we may also collect  
"non-personal" information. We consider "non-personal  
information" to be information that, by itself, cannot be used  
to identify or contact you personally, such as demographic  
information (your age, gender, income, education,  
E-mail Communications  
profession, zip code, etc.). Non-personal information may  
also include technical information, such as your IP address  
and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service.  
If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we  
may use your personal information to respond to your  
questions or comments, and we may save your questions or  
comments for future reference. Aside from our reply to such  
an e-mail, it is not our standard practice to send you e-mail  
unless you request a particular service that involves e-mail  
communications. However, you consent to us contacting you  
by e-mail, and sending you information about products and  
services which we believe may be of interest to you. You may  
have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter  
in which case information about the Service or our  
Non-personal information may also include information that  
you provide us through your use of the Service, such as the  
terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail  
inbox and instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or  
disclose non-personal information in any way we see fit.  
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT  
Our Services  
We use your personal information to provide you with any  
services that you may request or require, to communicate  
with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We  
advertisers will be sent to your e-mail address. We will  
provide you with the option to change your preferences and  
opt-out of receiving those communications. You may request  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
 
at any time that we not e-mail you in future by clicking the  
"unsubscribe" link which is included at the bottom of any  
e-mail that you receive from us. If you unsubscribe, we will  
make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-mail  
We require these companies to use your personal  
information only to provide the particular product or service  
and do not authorize them to use your personal information  
for any other reason. We sometimes offer promotions in  
conjunction with a third party sponsor.  
communications to you as soon as practicable.  
If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may  
share your information with the sponsor if they need it to  
send you a product or other special promotion they offer.  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO  
THIRD PARTIES  
Aggregate Information  
Third Party Advertisers  
Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do  
not share your personal information with any third party  
without your permission. We may disclose aggregate  
information, such as demographic information, and our  
statistical analyses to third parties, including advertisers or  
other business partners. This aggregate information does not  
include your personal information.  
We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver  
specific advertisements to you. These companies may collect  
non-personal information about your visits to Social Hub in  
order to provide advertisements about products and services  
that may be of interest to you.  
These companies may also aggregate your non-personal  
information for use in targeted advertising, marketing  
research, and other similar purposes. These companies may  
place their own cookies on your computer. If you want to  
prevent a third-party advertiser from collecting and using this  
information, you may visit each third party advertiser's  
website directly and opt-out.  
Service Providers  
We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in  
providing you certain services. For example, we may use  
third parties to provide advertising, marketing and  
promotional assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate  
our online services. In those instances, we may need to  
share your personal information with them.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
always some risk in transmitting information electronically.  
The personal information we collect is stored within  
databases that we control.  
Other Disclosures  
We may disclose personal information when we are required  
or requested to do so by law, court order or other  
government or law enforcement authority or regulatory  
agency; to enforce or apply our rights and agreements; or  
when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information  
is necessary or advisable, including, for example, to protect  
the rights, property, or safety of the Service and Samsung,  
our users, or others.  
As we deem appropriate, we use security measures  
consistent with industry standards, such as firewalls and  
encryption technology, to protect your information. However,  
we cannot guarantee the security of our databases, nor can  
we guarantee that information you supply won't be  
intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet.  
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC  
AREAS  
CHILDREN  
The Service is not designed for use by children without their  
parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of  
sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the  
Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal  
information from children under the age of eighteen, and  
therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to  
third parties.  
Our third party service and content providers may offer chat,  
user reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and  
any posting by you is considered public information available  
to other users. Any posting is governed in accordance with  
the third party service and content providers' terms and  
conditions. You should take care not to use personal  
information in your screen name or other information that  
might be publicly available to other users.  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE  
COLLECT  
The security of your personal information is important to us.  
We maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards  
to secure your personal information. However, there is  
Archived Information  
We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other  
systems and information in relation to the Service. Please  
note that it is possible some of this information may remain  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
     
archived after we delete the information from its active  
database. We maintain archives for disaster recovery, legal  
and other non-marketing purposes.  
ACCURACYOFTHEINFORMATIONWE  
COLLECT  
Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy,  
the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your  
personal information, or any requests that we correct,  
update, or remove your information in our databases, should  
be directed via e-mail to [email protected], or via  
regular mail to:  
How can I update my profile?  
You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by  
notifying us when you change zip/postal code, country of  
residence, age range, or e-mail address. If at any time you  
wish to update your information or stop receiving  
communication from us, sign in to the Service and then  
select 'update your profile' to change your preferences.  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082  
Attn: Customer Support Department  
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES  
Registration may be required to enter promotions such as  
contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration  
or entry processes may require your submission of personal  
information such as your first and last name, street address,  
city, state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number  
and date of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the  
promotion will provide the specific requirements for the  
promotion. You may also have the opportunity to opt-in to  
special offers from our advertisers in connection with these  
promotions.  
After receiving a request to change your information, we will  
make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal  
information stored in databases we actively use to operate  
the Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted,  
as appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However,  
we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any  
information we remove from or change in our active  
databases. We may retain such information to resolve  
disputes, troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each  
and every record of the information you have provided to us.  
A copy of your personal information may exist in a  
non-erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to  
locate.  
2. LICENSE  
2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a  
limited, personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to  
use the Software in object code executable only form on a  
single device for non-commercial uses.  
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY  
2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License  
are reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit  
any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly  
authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt,  
you have no right to use, incorporate into other products,  
copy, modify, translate or transfer to any third party the  
Software or any modification, adaptation or copy of the  
Software or any part thereof, nor to decompile, reverse  
engineer, or disassemble the binary code of the Software,  
either in whole or in part, except as expressly provided in this  
License.  
This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and  
complies with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We  
reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time,  
and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the  
Social Hub website. Please refer back to the Social Hub  
website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date  
Privacy Policy.  
Social Hub End User License  
Agreement  
1. SOCIAL HUB  
This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social  
Hub ("Software") made available on your mobile device. This  
License is a legally binding agreement between you and  
Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor").  
2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent,  
lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise  
dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis  
without the prior written consent of Licensor.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
   
4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can  
show such possession from written records (other than as a  
result of a breach of this clause 4); or  
3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY  
RIGHTS  
3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this  
License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property  
rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the  
Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of  
Licensor or its licensors.  
4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain  
(other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4).  
4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily  
disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or  
court order, such disclosure shall not be a breach of this  
clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such  
disclosure.  
3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright  
notices or similar proprietary devices, including without  
limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that  
may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the  
Software.  
5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT  
The Software is provided "as is" with no representation,  
guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or  
that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights  
(including intellectual property rights). Licensor has no  
obligation under this License to provide technical or other  
support to you.  
4. CONFIDENTIALITY  
4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the  
Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary  
confidential information of Licensor and its licensors. You  
agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential  
information in the Software or derived from it to any third  
party.  
6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY  
6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:  
4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any  
information which is:  
6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's  
negligence;  
4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality  
(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or  
6.1.2 for fraud; or  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor  
to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability.  
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF SAVINGS,  
DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS) HOWSOEVER  
CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH:  
6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY  
EXCLUDES (TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW),  
ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL  
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL  
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS,  
EXPRESS (OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE)  
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE  
WHICH, BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT  
SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS  
LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY  
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR  
SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE  
SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S  
EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;  
6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;  
6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR  
6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE  
GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR.  
6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO  
YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST  
PROFITS, EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL  
APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER  
FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT,  
NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY, PRODUCTS LIABILITY,  
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, OR ANY OTHER  
THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS  
6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO  
LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY  
DUTY, RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY,  
DEATH, DAMAGE OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
LOSS (ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS,  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY  
WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE,  
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION  
AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING  
AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG  
WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH  
CLAIM.  
7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason  
whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable  
your access to the Software.  
7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is  
without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either  
party accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5,  
6, 7.3, 8, 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be  
enforceable notwithstanding termination.  
6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause  
6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such  
risk and/or insure accordingly.  
8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION  
8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance,  
validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any  
term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State  
of New York.  
6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected  
by this clause 6.  
7. TERM AND TERMINATION  
8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive  
jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in  
connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree to  
submit to that jurisdiction.  
7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your  
acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software  
and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause  
7.2 or otherwise in accordance with this License.  
9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW  
7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to  
comply with any term or condition of this License or if you  
cease to use the Software for any reason.  
You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact  
that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of  
Korea, you may be subject to additional laws in other  
jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software. You  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the  
Software, including without limitation any applicable export  
laws or regulations.  
10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this  
License by updating the License on its web site, or by  
notifying you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check  
the Licensor's website periodically for notices concerning  
revisions. Your continued use of the Software shall be  
deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms.  
10.GENERAL  
10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any  
court, tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent  
jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that  
provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this  
License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible,  
modifying any other clause or part of this License and this  
will not affect any other provisions of this License which will  
remain in full force and effect.  
10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this  
License by using the Software on any device.  
10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right,  
power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any  
partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or  
of some other right, power or remedy.  
10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its  
terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it.  
10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties  
have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License  
and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements,  
representations or understandings between the parties in  
relation to such subject matter.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Index  
Care and Maintenance 214  
Children and Cell Phones 206  
Contacts  
A
B
Accounts  
Back button 23  
Battery  
charging 7  
indicator 7  
setting up 51  
Alarm  
Turning Off 143  
AllShare  
configuring 144  
Android keyboard  
configuring 44  
App Shortcuts 33  
Application Bar 20, 24  
Applications 36  
creating 52  
display options 54  
exporting and importing 57  
groups 58  
joining 56  
linking 56  
installing and removing 7  
Battery Use & Safety 210  
Bluetooth  
pairing with a device 136  
settings 173  
turning on or off 136  
Browser  
Quick Controls 86  
Browser Settings 83  
C
Calendar 146  
Camcorder  
recording video 118  
settings 119  
namecards 57  
separating joined 56  
setting a photo as contact  
icon 126  
starred contacts 59  
updating 53  
downloading new 161  
Applications settings  
allow mock locations 198  
development 198  
D
Display / Touch-Screen 212  
Display settings  
font style 180  
DivX®  
registration code 200  
managing 182  
running services 183  
stay awake 198  
USB debugging 198  
Camera  
settings 115  
taking photos 114  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do cell phones pose a health  
hazard? 202  
Downloads  
Google  
Gmail 61  
Latitude 86  
Local 88  
Home screen 19  
adding widgets 29  
customizing 21  
folders 34  
managing 138  
Maps 89  
Navigation 92  
primary shortcuts 29  
wallpaper 34  
E
Email  
Combined view 67  
composing and sending 68  
configuring accounts 66  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 202  
Play Store 161  
your account 10  
YouTube 96, 170  
Google Messenger 77  
Google Play 161  
Google Search 96, 165  
Google Voice Typing 50  
Google+ 78  
I
Internet 78  
K
Kies 139  
via Wi-Fi 174  
F
L
FCC Notice and Cautions 219  
Firmware Update 139  
G
Gallery 123  
sharing photos and video 127  
viewing photos and video 124  
Gmail  
Language and keyboard settings  
select locale 190  
GPS 213  
GPS Applications 141  
Groups  
Latitude Settings 91  
Local 88  
Location Services Settings 185  
Locking and Unlocking  
unlocking the keypad 14  
creating 58  
H
Health and Safety Information 202  
Home button 23  
account settings 64  
composing and sending 64  
refreshing your account 62  
setting up your account 61  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
O
R
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 205  
Reset  
factory data 195  
Responsible Listening 215  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 219  
S
Samsung keypad  
entering text 43  
Samsung Kies 139  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling 212  
SAR Values 208  
Screen settings  
Maps 89, 154  
Operating Environment 217  
Other Important Safety  
Information 219  
Menu  
context-sensitive 24  
Messages  
P
Pairing with Bluetooth 136  
Photo ID  
Gmail 61  
types 61  
Messenger 77  
setting 126  
Photos  
Gallery 123  
sharing 127  
taking 114  
Play Store 161  
Playlists  
Mini App Tray 20, 35  
Music  
add songs to a playlist 104  
creating a playlist 104, 107  
Music Player 106  
Music app 98  
N
Namecards  
adding songs 104  
creating 104, 107  
Powering On and Off 9  
Predictive Text 191  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 195  
sending 57  
Navigation 23  
auto adjust screen power 180  
auto-rotate screen 179  
brightness 179  
timeout 180  
Search  
command keys 29  
Primary Shortcuts 29  
screen 24  
Navigation button 23  
Notification Panel 25  
Notifications 25  
Q
Quick Controls 86  
Google 96, 165  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing your device  
locking and unlocking 14  
Security  
locking and unlocking 14  
locking your device 14  
Security settings  
device administration 189  
passwords 189  
trusted credentials 189  
Settings 171  
Location Services 185  
Shortcuts 33  
Smart Practices While Driving 209  
Snooze 143  
Social Hub 231  
Software Update 200  
Sound settings  
Swype  
configuring 49  
entering text 48  
help 49  
Synchronization settings  
auto-sync 184  
V
Videos  
Gallery 123  
recording 118  
sharing 127  
Volume  
key 18  
T
Text  
W
changing input method 43  
entering 42  
input methods 42  
using Swype 48  
virtual QWERTY keyboard 42  
Turning Your Device On and Off 9  
Warranty Information 221  
Widgets 29  
Wi-Fi  
adding a connection  
manually 134  
Direct 57  
U
Direct settings 176  
enabling 86  
scanning and connecting 134  
settings 171  
turning on or off 133, 171  
WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 133  
Wi-Fi Direct 28, 134  
Windows Media Player  
synchronizing with 140  
UL Certified Travel Charger 212  
Update Available 141  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 140  
USB settings  
as a mass storage device 140  
mass storage device 140  
Windows Media Player 140  
notifications 177  
ringer volume 176  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information 207  
Standard Limited Warranty 221  
Status Bar 27  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless Networking  
Bluetooth 135  
Wi-Fi 133  
X
Y
XT9 Predictive Text 191  
YouTube 96, 170  
World Clock 168  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA Flat Panel Television HD56W151 User Guide
RCA TV DVD Combo LED24B45RQD User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware M34559T PTCB User Guide
Roberts Radio MP3 Docking Station MP 24 User Guide
Samsung Computer Hardware M391B5273DH0 User Guide
Sanus Systems TV Mount MD115 User Guide
Sanyo CRT Television DS13204, DS19204, DS25204 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television CE32DFN2 B User Guide
Sanyo Network Card SHA KA128A User Guide
Savin All in One Printer 2335 User Guide